Cooling Only (50Hz) : RR Series

EDHK281006
Warning Daikin Industries, Ltd.’s products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the
EDHK281006
world. Daikin Industries, Ltd. does not have control over which products are exported to and used in a
particular country. Prior to purchase, please therefore confirm with your local authorised importer,
distributor and/or retailer whether this product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for
use, in the region where the product will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict
or modify the application of any local legislation.
Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
ENGINEERING DATA
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
Read the User's Manual carefully before using this product. The User's Manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cooling only [50Hz]
RR series
RR series
Cooling only [50Hz]

Cautions on product corrosion
1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES, LTD. Organization:
AIR CONDITIONING MANUFACTURING DIVISION DAIKIN INDUSTRIES
(THAILAND) LTD. All of the Daikin Group’s business
Scope of Registration: facilities and subsidiaries in Japan
THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT AND MANUFACTURE OF Scope of Registration: are certified under the ISO 14001
COMMERCIAL AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, COOLING, THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT international standard for
REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT, COMMERCIAL HEATING AND MANUFACTURE OF AIR environment management.
EQUIPMENT, RESIDENTIAL AIR CONDITIONING CONDITIONERS AND THE
EQUIPMENT, HEAT RECLAIM VENTILATION, AIR COMPONENTS INCLUDING
JMI-0107 CLEANING EQUIPMENT, MARINE TYPE CONTAINER JQA-1452 COMPRESSORS USED FOR THEM
REFRIGERATION UNITS, COMPRESSORS AND VALVES.
Dealer
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/global_ac/
c All rights reserved
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of March 2010 but subject to change without notice.
EDHK281006
Printed in Japan 03/10/001 AK·FS.K
EDHK281006
Part 1 SkyAir RR Series ................................................................ 1

1. External Appearance...............................................................................3
2. Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature .....................................4
2.1 Model Name and Power Supply...............................................................4
2.2 Nomenclature ...........................................................................................5
3. Functions.................................................................................................6
3.1 Indoor Unit................................................................................................6
3.2 Outdoor Unit .............................................................................................7
4. Specifications ..........................................................................................8
5. Dimensions and Service Space ............................................................16
5.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................16
5.2 Wired Remote Controller........................................................................23
5.3 Wireless Remote Controller ...................................................................25
5.4 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................27
5.5 Installation Service Space ......................................................................31
6. Piping Diagrams....................................................................................34
6.1 Indoor Unit + Outdoor Unit .....................................................................34
7. Wiring Diagrams....................................................................................36
7.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................36
7.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................39
7.3 Field Wiring ............................................................................................43
8. Electric Characteristics..........................................................................44
8.1 RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 / RR100MY1 / RR125MY1 / RR140MY1 ..........44
9. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................46
10.Operation Limits ....................................................................................49
11.Fan Performance ..................................................................................50
11.1 FBQ-D ....................................................................................................50
12.Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions...........................................52
12.1 FHQ........................................................................................................52
13.Sound Level ..........................................................................................54
13.1 Overall Sound Level ...............................................................................54
13.2 Octave Band Level .................................................................................56
Part 2 Installation of Indoor / Outdoor Unit................................ 59

1. Centre of Gravity ...................................................................................60
2. Installation of Indoor Unit ......................................................................62
2.1 FCQ71KVEA / FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA............62
2.2 FHQ71BVV1B / FHQ100BVV1B / FHQ125BVV1B................................87
2.3 FBQ71DV1 / FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1.....................112
3. Installation of Outdoor Unit..................................................................139
3.1 RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 / RR100MY1 / RR125MY1 ..............................139
3.2 RR140MY1...........................................................................................155
Part 3 Detail Information of Options ........................................ 171

1. Accessories.........................................................................................173
1.1 Indoor Unit............................................................................................173
1.2 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................175
Table of Contents i
EDHK281006
2. Remote Controller ...............................................................................176

2.1 BRC1C61 — Wired Remote Controller ................................................176
2.2 BRC1D61 — Wired Remote Controller with
Weekly Schedule Timer .......................................................................180
2.3 BRC1E61 — Navigation Remote Controller (Wired Type)...................186
2.4 Wireless Remote Controller .................................................................200
3. FCQ.....................................................................................................202
3.1 BYCP125K-W1 — Decoration Panel ...................................................202
3.2 KDBH55K160F — Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet................207
3.3 KDBP55H160FA — Panel Spacer .......................................................211
3.4 KDDP55K160(K) — Fresh Air Intake Kit (Chamber Type)...................214
3.5 KDDP55X160 — Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type)...........219
3.6 KAFP556H80 / KAFP556H160, KAFP557H80 / KAFP557H160
— High Efficiency Filter (Including Chamber) ......................................222
— Replacement High Efficiency Filter..................................................225
3.8 KDDFP55H160 — High Efficiency Filter Chamber ..............................226
3.9 KAFP551K160 — Replacement Long-life Filter ...................................229
3.10 KAFP55H160 — Ultra Long-life Filter Unit (Including Chamber) .........230
3.11 KAFP55H160H — Replacement Ultra Long-life Filter..........................233
3.12 KKSJ55K160 — Chamber Connection Kit ...........................................234
3.13 KDJP55H80 / KDJP55H160 — Branch Duct Chamber........................235
3.14 KDTP55K80 / KDTP55K160 — Insulation Kit for High Humidity..........238
3.15 KRP1H98 — Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ....................................240
3.16 KRCS01-4B — Remote Sensor (for Indoor Temperature)...................245
4. FHQ.....................................................................................................249
4.1 KDU50N125VE — Drain-up Kit............................................................249
4.2 KAF501DA80 / KAF501DA112 / KAF501DA160
— Replacement Long-life Filter............................................................254
4.3 KHFP5MA160 — L-type Piping Kit (for Upward Direction) ..................255
4.4 KRP1CA93 — Installation Box for Adaptor PCB..................................256
4.6 DTA112BA51 — Interface Adaptor for SkyAir Series ..........................262
4.7 KJB212AA / KJB311AA — Electrical Box with Earth Terminal ............264
5. FBQ.....................................................................................................266
5.1 KTBJ25K80W (T) (F) / KTBJ25K160W(T) (F)
— Service Access Panel ......................................................................266
5.2 KDAJ25K71A / KDAJ25K140A — Air Discharge Adaptor....................269
5.3 KAF372AA80 / KAF372AA160 / KAF373AA80 / KAF373AA160
— High Efficiency Filter ........................................................................271
5.4 KDDF37AA80 / KDDF37AA160 — High Efficiency Filter Chamber .....272
5.5 KAF371AA80 / KAF371AA160 — Long Life Filter ...............................275
5.6 KAF375AA80 / KAF375AA160 — Long Life Filter Chamber Kit ..........276
5.7 KRP4A96 — Mounting Plate for Adaptor PCB.....................................279
6. Outdoor Unit........................................................................................286
6.1 KKPJ5F180 — Central Drain Plug .......................................................286
ii Table of Contents
EDHK281006
Part 1 1
SkyAir RR Series
Model series
Class 71 100 125 140
FCQ 71K 100K 125K 140K
Indoor unit FHQ 71BV 100BV 125BV
FBQ-D 71D 100D 125D 140D
Outdoor unit RR 71M 100M 125M 140M
1. External Appearance...............................................................................3
2. Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature .....................................4
2.1 Model Name and Power Supply...............................................................4
2.2 Nomenclature ...........................................................................................5
3. Functions.................................................................................................6
3.1 Indoor Unit................................................................................................6
3.2 Outdoor Unit .............................................................................................7
4. Specifications ..........................................................................................8
5. Dimensions and Service Space ............................................................16
5.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................16
5.2 Wired Remote Controller........................................................................23
5.3 Wireless Remote Controller ...................................................................25
5.4 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................27
5.5 Installation Service Space ......................................................................31
6. Piping Diagrams....................................................................................34
6.1 Indoor Unit + Outdoor Unit .....................................................................34
7. Wiring Diagrams....................................................................................36
7.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................36
7.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................39
7.3 Field Wiring ............................................................................................43
8. Electric Characteristics..........................................................................44
8.1 RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 / RR100MY1 / RR125MY1 / RR140MY1 ..........44
9. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................46
10.Operation Limits ....................................................................................49
11.Fan Performance ..................................................................................50
11.1 FBQ-D ....................................................................................................50
12.Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions...........................................52
12.1 FHQ........................................................................................................52
SkyAir RR Series 1
EDHK281006
13.Sound Level ..........................................................................................54

13.1 Overall Sound Level ...............................................................................54
13.2 Octave Band Level .................................................................................56
2 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 External Appearance
1. External Appearance
1
Indoor Unit
FCQ FHQ FBQ-D
Remote Controller
Wired Type Wireless Type
BRC1C61 BRC1D61 BRC1E61
Outdoor Unit
RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 RR100MY1 RR125MY1 RR140MY1
SkyAir RR Series 3
Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature EDHK281006
2. Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature

2.1 Model Name and Power Supply
Indoor unit Outdoor unit Power supply

FCQ71KVEA RR71MV1 1 phase, 220-230V, 50Hz
FCQ71KVEA RR71MY1
FCQ100KVEA RR100MY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
FCQ125KVEA RR125MY1
FCQ140KVEA RR140MY1
FHQ71BVV1B RR71MV1 1 phase, 220-230V, 50Hz
FHQ71BVV1B RR71MY1
FHQ100BVV1B RR100MY1 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
FHQ125BVV1B RR125MY1
FBQ71DV1 RR71MV1 1 phase, 220-230V, 50Hz
FBQ71DV1 RR71MY1
FBQ100DV1 RR100MY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
FBQ125DV1 RR125MY1
FBQ140DV1 RR140MY1
Notes: 1. : New Model or Changed Model
2. Power Supply Intake : Outdoor Unit
4 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature
2.2 Nomenclature
1
Indoor Unit
FC Q 71 K VE A
For Australia
Power Supply Symbol
VE : 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz / 220V, 60Hz
V1 : 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
Indicates Major Design Category

Capacity Indication
Refrigerant : R-410A
FC : Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type
FH : Ceiling Suspended Type
FB-D : Duct Connection Middle and High Static Pressure Type
Outdoor Unit
R R 100 M V1
Power Supply Symbol
V1 : 1 phase, 220-230V, 50Hz
Y1 : 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
Indicates Major Design Category
Capacity Indication
Refrigerant : R-410A, Cooling Only
Outdoor Unit for Pair Use
SkyAir RR Series 5
Functions EDHK281006
3. Functions
3.1 Indoor Unit
Items Features FCQ FHQ FBQ-D

Auto swing { { —
Swing pattern selection { — —
Switchable fan speed { { {
Program “Dry” { { {
High ceiling application { { (*1) —
Control
High fan speed mode — — —
Two selectable Wired type { { {
thermo-sensors Wireless type — — —
Year-round cooling applicable { { {
Timer selector { { {
Mould Mould resistant treatment for filter { { —
prevention Mould-proofing drain pan — — —
Drain pump mechanism { { —
Pre-charged for up to 10 m — — —
Pre-charged for up to 30 m { { {
Work & Long-life filter { { —
servicing Filter sign { { {
Ceiling soiling prevention { — —
Emergency operation { { —
Self-diagnosis function { { {
Auto-restart { { {
Control by 2 remote controllers { { {
Control Control by 1 remote controller { { {
features External command control { { {
Central remote control { { {
Interlock control { { {
Ultra long life filter { — —
Option High-efficiency filter { — {
Fresh air intake kit { — —
Others PE fin for outdoor unit { { {
Notes: { : Functions exist.

— : No functions
*1 : Installable on max. 3.5 m high ceiling
6 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Functions
3.2 Outdoor Unit

1
RR71MV1
RR71MY1
Items Functions RR140MY1
RR100MY1
RR125MY1
Inverter Control
(For Comfortable Air Conditioning)
— —
Control
Night time Quiet Operation
Function for cooling — —
Operation Wide Operation Range Cooling –15~46°CDB –5~46°CDB
Range
Notes: { : Functions exist.

— : No functions
SkyAir RR Series 7
Specifications EDHK281006
4. Specifications
FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–)
Indoor unit FCQ71KVEA FCQ71KVEA
Model
Outdoor unit RR71MV1 RR71MY1
Power supply V1: 1 phase, 220-230V, 50Hz Y1: 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
kW 7.7 7.7
Cooling capacity *1 *2 Btu/h 26,300 26,300
kcal/h 6,600 6,600
Colour — —
Dimensions H×W×D mm 256×840×840 256×840×840
Type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSL tubes) Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSL tubes)
Coil Rows×stages×fin pitch 2×10×1.2 2×10×1.2
Face area m² 0.446 0.446
Model QTS48C15M QTS48C15M
Type Turbo fan Turbo fan
Fan Motor output W 56 56
m³/min 21/13.5 21/13.5
Air flow rate (H/L)
cfm 741/476 741/476
Sound level (H/L) *5 dB(A) 35/28 35/28
Mass (weight) kg 21 21
Liquid mm φ9.5 (Flare) φ9.5 (Flare)
Piping Gas mm φ15.9 (Flare) φ15.9 (Flare)
connections
Drain mm I.D.φ25 O.D.φ32 I.D.φ25 O.D.φ32
Wired *4 BRC1C61 BRC1C61
Remote controller (option)
Wireless BRC7F632F BRC7F632F
Model BYCP125K-W1 BYCP125K-W1
Colour Fresh white Fresh white
Decoration Dimensions H×W×D mm 50×950×950 50×950×950
panel (option)
Air filter Resin net (with mould resistance) Resin net (with mould resistance)
Mass (weight) kg 5.5 5.5
Colour Ivory white Ivory white
Type Cross fin coil (Fine louver fins and Hi-XSL tubes) Cross fin coil (Fine louver fins and Hi-XSL tubes)
Face area m² 0.641 0.641
Model JT90G-P4V1N JT90G-YE
Comp. Type Hermetically sealed scroll type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output kW 2.2 2.2
Type Propeller Propeller
Air flow rate m³/min 48-50 48-51
Cooling dB(A) 50 50
Sound level *5
Night quiet mode dB(A) — —
connections
Drain mm φ26.0 (Hole) *3 φ26.0 (Hole) *3
Safety devices High pressure switch. Low pressure switch. Fuse. High pressure switch. Low pressure switch. Fuse.
Capacity step % 100-0 100-0
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Max. length m 70 (equivalent length 90m) 70 (equivalent length 90m)
Ref. piping
Max. height difference m 30 30
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge (factory charge) kg 2.7 (charged for 30m) 2.7 (charged for 30m)
Model Refer to the name plate of compressor. Refer to the name plate of compressor.
Ref. oil
Charge L 1.1 1.1
Drawing No. C : 4D067078 C : 4D067078
Notes: *1. The above data are based on the following conditions. Conversion formulae
Cooling Piping length kcal/h=kW×860
Indoor : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB 7.5m Btu/h=kW×3412
Outdoor : 35°CDB, 24°CWB (Horizontal) cfm=m³/min×35.3
*2. Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling for indoor fan motor heat.
*3. In case of drain piping for outdoor unit, drain piping kit (option) is needed.
*4. Wire for remote controller : Field supplied.
*5. Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured according to JIS parameters and criteria. During operation
these values are somewhat higher owing to ambient conditions.
8 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Specifications
FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–) 1

Model
Outdoor unit RR100MY1 RR125MY1
Power supply Y1: 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz Y1: 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
kW 10.5 12.8
kcal/h 9,000 11,000
Colour — —
Face area m² 0.535 0.535
Model QTS48C15M QTS48C15M
Type Turbo fan Turbo fan
m³/min 32/20 33/22.5
Air flow rate (H/L)
cfm 1,129/706 1,164/794
connections
Wireless BRC7F632F BRC7F632F
Model BYCP125K-W1 BYCP125K-W1
Colour Fresh white Fresh white
Decoration Dimensions H×W×D mm 50×950×950 50×950×950
panel (option)
Mass (weight) kg 5.5 5.5
Dimensions H×W×D mm 1,170×900×320 1,170×900×320
Face area m² 0.983 0.983
Model JT125G-YE JT160G-YE
Fan Motor output W 90 65+85
Cooling dB(A) 53 53
Sound level *5
connections
Ref. piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. oil
Charge L 1.5 1.5
Drawing No. C : 4D067079 C : 4D067080
SkyAir RR Series 9
FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–)

Indoor unit FCQ140KVEA
Model
Outdoor unit RR140MY1
Power supply Y1: 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
kW 14.2
Cooling capacity *1 *2 Btu/h 48,500
kcal/h 12,200
Indoor unit FCQ140KVEA
Colour —
Dimensions H×W×D mm 298×840×840
Type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSL tubes)
Coil Rows×stages×fin pitch 2×12×1.2
Face area m² 0.535
Model QTS48C15M
Type Turbo fan
Fan Motor output W 120
m³/min 33/22.5
Air flow rate (H/L)
cfm 1,164/794
Sound level (H/L) *5 dB(A) 44/36
Mass (weight) kg 24
Liquid mm φ9.5 (Flare)
Piping Gas mm φ15.9 (Flare)
connections
Drain mm I.D.φ25 O.D.φ32
Wired *4 BRC1C61
Wireless BRC7F632F
Model BYCP125K-W1
Colour Fresh white
Decoration Dimensions H×W×D mm 50×950×950
panel (option)
Air filter Resin net (with mould resistance)
Mass (weight) kg 5.5
Colour Ivory white
Dimensions H×W×D mm 1,345×900×320
Type Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XSL tubes)
Face area m² 1.153
Model JT1G-VDYR
Comp. Type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output kW 2.84
Type Propeller
Fan Motor output W 70+70
Air flow rate m³/min 100
Cooling dB(A) 54
Sound level *5
Night quiet mode dB(A) —
Mass (weight) kg 108
connections
Drain mm φ26.0 (Hole) *3
Safety devices High pressure switch. Low pressure switch. Fuse.
Capacity step % Compressor revolution speed fixed control
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve
Max. length m 70 (equivalent length 90m)
Ref. piping
Max. height difference m 30
Model R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge (factory charge) kg 4.3 (charged for 30m)
Model Refer to the name plate of compressor.
Ref. oil
Charge L 1.2
Drawing No. C : 4D067081
10 SkyAir RR Series
FHQ (Ceiling suspended type) 1

Indoor unit FHQ71BVV1B FHQ71BVV1B
Model
Power supply V1: 1 phase, 220-230V, 50Hz Y1: 3 phase, 380-415V
kW 7.1 7.1
kcal/h 6,100 6,100
Colour White White
Dimensions H×W×D mm 195×1,160×680 195×1,160×680
Face area m² 0.233 0.233
Type Sirocco fan Sirocco fan
Motor output W 62 62
Fan
m³/min 17/14 17/14
Air flow rate (H/L)
cfm 600/494 600/494
connections
Drain mm VP20 (I.D.φ20 O.D.φ26) VP20 (I.D.φ20 O.D.φ26)
Wireless BRC7E66 BRC7E66
Face area m² 0.641 0.641
Cooling dB(A) 50 50
Sound level *5
connections
Max. length m 70 (Equivalent length 90m) 70 (Equivalent length 90m)
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 1.1 1.1
Drawing No. C: 4D067078 C: 4D067078
Outdoor : 35°CDB (Horizontal) cfm=m³/min×35.3
SkyAir RR Series 11
FHQ (Ceiling suspended type)

Model
kW 9.8 12.2
kcal/h 8,400 10,500
Colour White White
Face area m² 0.293 0.341
Fan
m³/min 24/20 30/25
Air flow rate (H/L)
cfm 847/706 1,059/883
connections
Drain mm VP20 (I.D.φ20 O.D.φ26) VP20 (I.D.φ20 O.D.φ26)
Wireless BRC7E66 BRC7E66
Face area m² 0.983 0.983
Cooling dB(A) 53 53
Sound level *5
connections
Ref. piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. oil
Charge L 1.5 1.5
Drawing No. C : 4D067079 C : 4D067080
Outdoor : 35°CDB (Horizontal) cfm=m³/min×35.3
12 SkyAir RR Series
FBQ (Duct connection middle and high static pressure type) 1

Indoor unit FBQ71DV1 FBQ71DV1
Model
Power supply V1: 1 phase, 220-230V, 50Hz Y1: 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
kW 7.1 7.1
kcal/h 6,100 6,100
Colour — —
Face area m² 0.249 0.249
Fan
m³/min 18/15 18/15
Air flow rate (H/L)
cfm 635/530 635/530
Air filter — *3 — *3
connections
Wireless BRC4C64 BRC4C64
Face area m² 0.641 0.641
Cooling dB(A) 50 50
Sound level *6
connections
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 1.1 1.1
Drawing No. C: 4D067078 C: 4D067078
Notes: *1. The above data based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion formulae
Mark Cooling Piping length
kcal/h=kW×860
(1) Indoor : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB 7.5m Btu/h=kW×3412
*3. Air filter is not standard accessory, but please mount it in the duct system of the suction side.
Select its dust collection efficiency (gravity method) 50% or more.
SkyAir RR Series 13
FBQ (Duct connection middle and high static pressure type)

Model
kW 10.0 12.2
kcal/h 8,600 10,500
Colour — —
Face area m² 0.383 0.383
Fan
m³/min 32/23 39/28
Air flow rate (H/L)
cfm 1,130/812 1,377/988
Air filter — *3 — *3
connections
Wireless BRC4C64 BRC4C64
Face area m² 0.983 0.983
Cooling dB(A) 53 53
Sound level *6
connections
Capacity control method % 100-0 100-0
Ref. piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. oil
Charge L 1.5 1.5
Drawing No. C : 4D067079 C : 4D067080
Notes: *1. The above data based on the conditions shown in the table below. Conversion formulae
Mark Cooling Piping length kcal/h=kW×860
14 SkyAir RR Series
FBQ (Duct connection middle and high static pressure type) 1

Indoor unit FBQ140DV1
Model
Power supply Y1: 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
kW 14.1
Cooling capacity *1 *2 Btu/h 48,100
kcal/h 12,100
Indoor unit FBQ140DV1
Colour —
Dimensions H×W×D mm 300×1,400×700
Type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSL tubes)
Face area m² 0.383
Type Sirocco fan
Motor output W 350
Fan
m³/min 39/28
Air flow rate (H/L)
cfm 1,377/988
Sound level (H/L) *6 dB(A) 40/36
Air filter — *3
Mass (weight) kg 46
connections
Drain mm I.D.φ25 O.D.φ32
Wired *5 BRC1C61
Wireless BRC4C64
Colour Ivory white
Dimensions H×W×D mm 1,345×900×320
Type Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XSL tubes)
Face area m² 1.153
Model JT1G-VDYR
Comp. Type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output kW 3.0
Type Propeller
Fan Motor output W 70+70
Air flow rate m³/min 100
Cooling dB(A) 54
Sound level *6
Night quiet mode dB(A) —
Mass (weight) kg 108
connections
Drain mm φ26.0 (Hole) *4
Safety devices High pressure switch. Low pressure switch. Fuse.
Capacity step % Compressor revolution speed fixed control
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve
Max. length m 70 (equivalent length 90m)
Ref. Piping
Max. height difference m 30
Model R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge (factory charge) kg 4.3 (charged for 30m)
Model Refer to the name plate of compressor.
Ref. Oil
Charge L 1.2
Drawing No. C: 4D067081
Notes: *1. The above data based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Conversion formulae
Mark Cooling Piping length
kcal/h=kW×860
SkyAir RR Series 15
Dimensions and Service Space EDHK281006
5. Dimensions and Service Space

5.1 Indoor Unit
5.1.1 FCQ
FCQ71KVEA
Unit (mm)
3D058460B
16 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Dimensions and Service Space
FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA 1
3D058469B
Unit (mm)
SkyAir RR Series 17
18
Unit (mm)
5.1.2
170 12 9
FHQ71BVV1B
FHQ
145 60
105
90
135
18 17 16 142 58
36
115 60
65
40
160
102
185
210
85
50 60 65
192
Position slit hole for taking out in piping back
Dimensions and Service Space
127 (View from the front)
260
105
10 15
5
(Required space)
(Hanging position)
8
135
5 11 80
1120
40
(Hanging position)
Hanging bolt Position : Hole of wall
90
1
155
4-M8 ~ M10 for taking out in piping back

680
(View from the front)
5
(Required space)
55 14
4 φ45
155
195
Number Name Description
55 1 Air discharge grille

13
2 Air suction grille
6 30 or more 1160 30 or more
(Service space) (Service space) 3 Air filter
300 or more
(Required space)
4 Gas pipe connection φ15.9 flare
The front
5 Liquid pipe connection φ9.5 flare
For height installation

Obstacle Brand name plate
(Note.2) 6 Drain pipe connection VP20
From the floor side 2500 or more

Floor side
7 Earth terminal (Inside the electric components box) M4
8 Suspension bracket
Drain pipe 9 Backward piping and wiring connection opening lid

connection VP20
6 10 Upward piping and wiring connection opening lid
(For left piping)
11 Right side pipe connection Slit hole
12 Left back drain pipe connection Slit hole
13 Left side drain pipe connection Slit hole
300
275
275
Slit hole
225
14 Right side drain pipe connection

15 Hole of wall for taking out in piping back φ100
80 80 16 Upward drain pipe connection φ60

Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate : Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille.
105 17 Upward gas pipe connection φ36
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal 4
receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail.
3 2 7 5 18 Upward liquid pipe connection φ26
170
3. The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
2
(0.5mm × 2 wicks × O.D. φ5.4)
(It is not attached to VRV.)
C: 3D027538F
EDHK281006
SkyAir RR Series
Unit (mm)
170
12 9
EDHK281006
105 145 60
FHQ100BVV1B
18 17 16 90
SkyAir RR Series
142 58
36
135
115 60
160
102
185
210
40
85
65
192
50 60 65

127
260
10 105
15
(Required space)
5
(Hanging position)
8
135
1360 5 11 80
(Hanging position)
Hanging bolt 1
40
680 4-M8 ~ M10 Position:Hole of wall
for taking out in piping back
5
(Required space)
90
155
155
195
55
4 φ45 14
55 Number Name Description
13
6 1 Air discharge grille
30 or more 1400 30 or more
Air suction grille
300 or more
(Service space) (Service space) 2
(Required space)
3 Air filter
The front 4 Gas pipe connection φ15.9 flare

Obstacle
Brand name plate
(Note.2) 5 Liquid pipe connection φ9.5 flare
Floor side

6 Drain pipe connection VP20
7 Earth terminal (Inside the electric components box) M4

Drain pipe
connection VP20 8 Suspension bracket
(For left piping)
6
9 Backward piping and wiring connection opening lid
10 Upward piping and wiring connection opening lid
300
275
275
225
14 Right side drain pipe connection Slit hole
80 80 15 Hole of wall for taking out in piping back φ100
16 Upward drain pipe connection φ60

Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate : Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille. 105
3 2 7 5 4 Upward gas pipe connection
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal 17 φ36
receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail. 170
18 Upward liquid pipe connection φ26
3.The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
(0.5mm²×2wicks×O.D. φ5.4)
(It is not attached to VRV.)
C: 3D044893A
19
1
20
Unit (mm)
170
105 12 9
145 60
18 17 16
FHQ125BVV1B
90
142 58
36
135
115 60
160
102
185
210
40
85
65
192
50 60 65

127
260
105
10
15
5
(Required space)
(Hanging position)
8
135
1550
(Hanging position) 5 11 80
Hanging bolt 40 Position : Hole of wall
4-M8 ~ M10 1
680 for taking out in piping back
5
90
(Required space)
155
13
155
195
55
4 φ45 14
55 Number Name Description

1 Air discharge grille
6
30 or more 1590 30 or more Air suction grille
2
300 or more
(Service space) (Service space)
(Required space)
3 Air filter
The front
Brand name plate 4 Gas pipe connection φ15.9 flare

Obstacle
(Note.2)
5 Liquid pipe connection φ9.5 flare
Floor side

6 Drain pipe connection VP20
Drain pipe 7 Earth terminal (Inside the electric components box) M4

connection VP20 6 8 Suspension bracket
(For left piping)
9 Backward piping and wiring connection opening lid
10 Upward piping and wiring connection opening lid
300
275
275
225
14 Right side drain pipe connection Slit hole

80 80 15 Hole of wall for taking out in piping back φ100
3
105 16 Upward drain pipe connection φ60
Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate : Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille. 2 7 5 4
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal 170 17 Upward gas pipe connection φ36
receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail.
18 Upward liquid pipe connection φ26
3.The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
(0.5mm²×2wicks×O.D. φ5.4)
(It is attached to VRV.)
C: 3D044894B
EDHK281006
SkyAir RR Series
5.1.3 FBQ-D
1
FBQ71DV1
Unit (mm)
3D060775C
SkyAir RR Series 21
FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1

Unit (mm)
3D060776C
22 SkyAir RR Series
5.2 Wired Remote Controller

1
BRC1C61
Unit (mm)
3D028952
BRC1D61
Unit (mm)
NOTE) 1. REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD AND STAPLE ARE NOT ATTACHED.

THEY ARE FIELD SUPPLIED PARTS.
• SPECIFICATIONS OF CORD
• REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS
FOR AUSTRALIA FOR OTHER COUNTRIES
SHIELD WIRE VINYL CORD WITH SHEATH OR CABLE
TYPE
(INSULATED THICKNESS: 1mm OR MORE) (INSULATED THICKNESS: 1mm OR MORE)
SIZE 0.75 ~ 1.25mm2
42
TOTAL
120
500m
84
LENGTH
38
120 17 18
CORD OUTLET HOLE
23 28
46
• INSTALLATION METHOD
A EXPOSED BODY, EXPOSED CORD B EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD C EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD
17 CONDUIT
STAPLE REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER REMOTE CONTROLLER
117
0~5
( BETWEEN REMOTE
CONTROLLER AND
CONTROL BOX
) 17 THROUGH HOLE
(φ12 ~ φ16)
17 CONTROL BOX
3D048117
SkyAir RR Series 23
BRC1E61
Unit (mm)
3D064037
24 SkyAir RR Series
5.3 Wireless Remote Controller

1
BRC7F632F (for FCQ)
Unit (mm)
3D052918C
BRC7E66 (for FHQ)

Unit (mm)
• REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS
TRANSMITTING PART
• RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
RECEIVER
157
62 17.5
• REMOTE CONTROLLER HOLDER

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
< INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE > • RECEIVER DETAIL
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
3D028963B
SkyAir RR Series 25
BRC4C64 (for FBQ)
• REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS • RECEIVER DETAIL Unit (mm)

TRANSMITTING PART
120
157
0.5
70 18 35
Switch box
62 17.5 (Field Supplied
2 – 5 × 9 Slot parts)
• REMOTE CONTROLLER HOLDER
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
< INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE >
P1 P2
(Ceiling Opening)
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
83.5
106
72
• Service space for ceiling installation
(Service space)
more than 90
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
NOTE Do not install more than 3 receivers in the vicinity of

one another. 49
With 4 or more units, there is always the possibility (Ceiling Opening)
of malfunction. 3D007898B
26 SkyAir RR Series
5.4 Outdoor Unit

1
RR71MV1 / RR71MY1
Unit (mm)
3D066644
SkyAir RR Series 27
RR100MY1
3D066645
Unit (mm)
28 SkyAir RR Series
RR125MY1 1
Unit (mm)
3D066646
SkyAir RR Series 29
RR140MY1
Unit (mm)
3D066659
30 SkyAir RR Series
5.5 Installation Service Space

1
RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 / RR100MY1 / RR125MY1 / RR140MY1
3D066642
SkyAir RR Series 31
3D066642
32 SkyAir RR Series
3D066642
SkyAir RR Series 33
Piping Diagrams EDHK281006
6. Piping Diagrams
6.1 Indoor Unit + Outdoor Unit
FCQ71KVEA / FHQ71BVV1B / FBQ71DV1 + RR71MV1 / RR71MY1

FCQ100KVEA / FHQ100BVV1B / FBQ100DV1 + RR100MY1
FCQ125KVEA / FHQ125BVV1B / FBQ125DV1 + RR125MY1
3D066643
34 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Piping Diagrams
FCQ140KVEA / FBQ140DV1 + RR140MY1 1
3D066662
SkyAir RR Series 35
36
7.1
A3P A4P
INDOOR UNIT GRN R2T S1L
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD A1P SS1 H1P
A1P t˚ X2A H2P BS1
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
R3T SS2 H3P
(HUMIDITY SENSOR UNIT) X2M H4P
C1 CAPACITOR t˚ V1R+ X18A X15A
TO OUTDOOR 1 BLK
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X24A
Wiring Diagrams
UNIT + X24A X1A X1A

Z1F K1R PS SS1 NOTE) 3
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) KPR - C1 NOTE) 3 RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY 2 WHT
NORM. EMG. X1M NOTE) 2
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) YLW
3 RED F2 CENTRAL REMOTE
Indoor Unit
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) X30A ORG

X27A F1 CONTROLLER
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) HAP BLU
X25A P2 P2
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) H05VV-U4G2.5 BLK P1 R1T WIRED REMOTE
RC TC YLW M P1 CONTROLLER
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) NOTE) 7 GRN/YLW ~ SS1
YLW X35A X33A
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL) M1P
NOTE) 3 NOTE) 3
R3T THERMISTOR PTC IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS
S1L FLOAT SWITCH X36A MSW
OPERATION SYSTEM
7. Wiring Diagrams
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH X16A

INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT M1S
(EMERGENCY) X20A
V1R DIODE BRIDGE (MASTER) (SLAVE)
Z1C X20A
X1M TERMINAL STRIP X2M X2M N=1 Z1C
X2M TERMINAL STRIP 1 1 N=1
BLU
BRN
RED
WHT
ORG
Z1C FERRITE CORE 2 2
CN1 R1T
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
RED
Z1F NOISE FILTER 3 3 A2P

MS WHT
PS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M1F 3~
RC SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT MS
M1F 3~
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
100~140-CLASS
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED TO
FCQ71KVEA / FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA
71-CLASS
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
REMOTE CONTROLLER
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) X24A A2P
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(ON-RED) X1M A1P X2M
(TIMER-GREEN)
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X35A X33A
(FILTER SIGN-RED) CONTROL BOX
(DEFROST-ORANGE)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH NOTES)
(MAIN/SUB) 1. : TERMINAL , : CONNECTOR : FIELD WIRING
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH 2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) MANUAL.
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS 3. X24A, X33A, X35A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED.
X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS 4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING DATA AND CATALOGS,
REMOTE CONTROLLER) ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
X33A CONNECTOR 5. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1, SS2) BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) 6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRN : GREEN ORG : ORANGE BRN : BROWN
X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL PNK : PINK GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
ADAPTOR) 7. SHOWS ONLY IN CASE OF PROTECTED PIPES.
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER USE H07RN-F IN CASE OF NO PROTECTION.
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
3D058379A
EDHK281006
SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006
SkyAir RR Series
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F) H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE R1T R2T
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) H2P OPERATION SYSTEM t° t°
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE A1P
(TIMER-GREEN) X1M SS1
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT TO OUTDOOR X2M
X19A X18A P2 P2
(MASTER) (SLAVE) UNIT 1 BLK X24A P1 R1T
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X61A P1
NOTE)4
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) (FILTER SIGN-RED) 1 1 2 WHT X10A T1R X11A X5A WIRED REMOTE
3 RED GRY CONTROLLER
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 2 2 t°
X27A X60A PRP
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) (DEFROST-ORANGE) 3 3 BLU
H05VV-U4G2.5
KPR X26A C1
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH
(MAIN/SUB) X2M X2M A1P A2P A3P
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL) SS1 H1P V1TR X20A
YLW
WHT
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
FHQ71BVV1B / FHQ100BVV1B / FHQ125BVV1B
REMOTE BS1
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH H2P RED M
SS2 ~
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) CONTROLLER H3P X25A
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) NOTE)6 BLK Q1M
X24A X2A H4P
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS X1A X1A
M1F
NOTE)4 RC TC KAR X29A
BLK MSW
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK X15A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH) ~
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT BLK
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK X25A CONNECTOR (DRAIN PUMP) M1S
RC SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT X33A CONNECTOR X14A
X40A X33A X35A HAP S1Q
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) X15A NOTE)6
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER X35A CONNECTOR
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X40A CONNECTOR
(ON/OFF INPUT FROM OUTSIDE) NOTES)
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT) X60A CONNECTOR 1. : TERMINAL
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD X61A (INTERFACE ADAPTOR , : CONNECTOR
FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
2. : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
X15A X33A X25A
5. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM,
X61A
A1P C1 T1R CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
X40A 6. IN CASE INSTALLING THE DRAIN PUMP (M1P), REMOVE THE JUMPER CONNECTOR OF X15A AND EXECUTE THE ADDITIONAL
X60A X1M X2M
WIRING FOR FLOAT SWITCH AND DRAIN PUMP.
X35A X24A CONTROL BOX 7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
3D043825B
37
Wiring Diagrams
1
Wiring Diagrams EDHK281006
FBQ71DV1 / FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1
3D066031A
38 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Wiring Diagrams
7.2 Outdoor Unit

1
RR71MV1
3D046988D
SkyAir RR Series 39
RR71MY1 / RR100MY1
3D046989D
40 SkyAir RR Series
RR125MY1 1
3D046987D
SkyAir RR Series 41
RR140MY1
3D047451E
42 SkyAir RR Series
7.3 Field Wiring

1
RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 / RR100MY1 / RR125MY1 / RR140MY1
C : 4D067292
SkyAir RR Series 43
Electric Characteristics EDHK281006
8. Electric Characteristics
8.1 RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 / RR100MY1 / RR125MY1 / RR140MY1
3D066687A
44 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Electric Characteristics
3D066686
SkyAir RR Series 45
Capacity Tables EDHK281006
9. Capacity Tables
FCQ71KVEA + RR71MV1 / RR71MY1
FCQ100KVEA + RR100MY1
3D066684
46 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Capacity Tables
FHQ71BVV1B + RR71MV1 / RR71MY1

FHQ100BVV1B + RR100MY1
1
FHQ125BVV1B + RR125MY1
3D066683
SkyAir RR Series 47
Capacity Tables EDHK281006
FBQ71DV1 + RR71MV1 / RR71MY1

FBQ100DV1 + RR100MY1
3D066685
48 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Operation Limits
10. Operation Limits

1
RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 / RR100MY1 / RR125MY1
3D066667
RR140MY1
3D066665
SkyAir RR Series 49
Fan Performance EDHK281006
11. Fan Performance

11.1 FBQ-D
FBQ71DV1
3D060745A
FBQ100DV1
3D060746A
50 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Fan Performance
FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1 1
3D060747A
SkyAir RR Series 51
Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions EDHK281006
12. Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions

12.1 FHQ
FHQ71BVV1B (Cooling)
52 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions
1
SkyAir RR Series 53
Sound Level EDHK281006
13. Sound Level

13.1 Overall Sound Level
13.1.1 Indoor Unit
dB(A)
220-240V, 50Hz
Model Measuring location
H L
FCQ71KVEA 35 28
FCQ100KVEA 43 32
FCQ125KVEA 44 34
4D058461
FCQ140KVEA 44 36
230V, 50Hz
H L
FHQ71BVV1B 39 35
FHQ100BVV1B 42 37
4D028281B
FHQ125BVV1B 44 39
220-240V, 50Hz
H L
FBQ71DV1 37 32
FBQ100DV1 38 33
FBQ125DV1 40 36
4D067285
FBQ140DV1 40 36
Note: Operation sound is measured in an anechoic chamber.

Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as the construction (acoustic absorption
coefficient) of the particular room in which the equipments installed.
54 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Sound Level
13.1.2 Outdoor Unit

dB(A) 1
220-230V, 50Hz
Cooling
RR71MV1 50
4D066650
380-415V, 50Hz
Cooling
RR71MY1 50
4D066650
RR100MY1 53
4D066651
RR125MY1 53
4D066652
RR140MY1 54
4D066664
Note: Operation sound is measured in an anechoic chamber.

Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as the construction (acoustic absorption
coefficient) of the particular room in which the equipments installed.
SkyAir RR Series 55
13.2 Octave Band Level

13.2.1 Indoor Unit
FCQ71KVEA FCQ100KVEA FCQ125KVEA
70 70 70
NC-60 NC-60 NC-60
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


60 60 60
NC-50 HI NC-50 NC-50

HI
dB (0dB=0.0002μ bar)
50 50 HI 50
NC-40 NC-40 NC-40

40 40 40
NC-30 NC-30 NC-30

LOW LOW
30 30 LOW 30
NC-20 NC-20 NC-20

20 20 20
APPROXIMATE APPROXIMATE APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING THRESHOLD HEARING THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS FOR CONTINUOUS FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE NOISE NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz) OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz) OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)
4D058461 4D058462 4D058463
FCQ140KVEA FHQ71BVV1B FHQ100BVV1B

70 70
NC-60 NC-60

60 60
NC-50 NC-50
50 HI 50
NC-40 NC-40
40 40 HI
LOW
NC-30
NC-30
LOW
30 30
NC-20 NC-20
20 20
APPROXIMATE APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz) OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)
4D058464 4D028355B 4D028283B
FHQ125BVV1B FBQ71DV1 FBQ100DV1

70
NC-60
60
NC-50
50
NC-40 HI
40
LOW
NC-30
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)
4D028284B 4D067285 4D067286
FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1
4D067287
56 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006 Sound Level
13.2.2 Outdoor Unit

RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 RR100MY1 RR125MY1 1
4D066650 4D066651 4D066652
RR140MY1
4D066664
SkyAir RR Series 57
58 SkyAir RR Series
EDHK281006
Part 2
Installation of 2
Indoor / Outdoor Unit
1. Centre of Gravity ...................................................................................60
2. Installation of Indoor Unit ......................................................................62
2.1 FCQ71KVEA / FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA............62
2.2 FHQ71BVV1B / FHQ100BVV1B / FHQ125BVV1B................................87
2.3 FBQ71DV1 / FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1.....................112
3. Installation of Outdoor Unit..................................................................139
3.1 RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 / RR100MY1 / RR125MY1 ..............................139
3.2 RR140MY1...........................................................................................155
Installation of Indoor / Outdoor Unit 59

Centre of Gravity EDHK281006
1. Centre of Gravity
RR71MV1 / RR71MY1
Unit (mm)
4D066647
RR100MY1
Unit (mm)
4D066648
60 Installation of Indoor / Outdoor Unit

EDHK281006 Centre of Gravity
RR125MY1
Unit (mm)
4D066649
RR140MY1
Unit (mm)
4D066666

Installation of Indoor Unit EDHK281006
2. Installation of Indoor Unit

2.1 FCQ71KVEA / FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA
2.1.1 Names and Functions of Parts
k j
a i
g
f
l d e
m h
b
c
a Indoor unit
b Outdoor unit
Remote controller
c Depending on the system configuration, the remote
controller is not provided.
d Inlet air
e Discharge air
f Air outlet
g Air flow flap (at air outlet)
h Refrigerant piping, connection electric wire
i Drain pipe
Model name (model name plate)
j
(Inside of suction grille)
Drain pumping out device(built-in)
k
Condensate removed from the room during cooling.
l Air filter (suction grille)
3P177429-3F

EDHK281006 Installation of Indoor Unit
2.1.2 Installation
FCQ71KVEA
FCQ100KVEA SPLIT SYSTEM
Installation manual
FCQ125KVEA Air Conditioners
FCQ140KVEA
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................................................1
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................3
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE................................................................................5
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION .................................................................7
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION .....................................................................................8
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK ..................................................................................10
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK .................................................................................................12
8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK .........................................................................................15
9. WIRING EXAMPLE ......................................................................................................17
10. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL .......................................................... 19
11. FIELD SETTING...........................................................................................................19
12. TEST OPERATION ......................................................................................................21
1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Please read these “SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS” carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and
be sure to install it correctly. After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and
explain to the customer how to operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation man-
ual. Ask the customer to store the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner is classified under “appliances not accessible to the general public”.
Meaning of WARNING and CAUTION notices.
WARNING .........Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or per-
sonal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
• Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work.
Do not attempt to install the air conditioner yourself. Improper installation may result in water leakage,
electric shocks or fire.
• Install the air conditioner in accordance with the instructions in this installation manual.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
• Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in the unit falling, water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
• Install the air conditioner on a foundation strong enough to withstand the weight of the unit.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injury.
• Carry out the specified installation work after taking into account strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Failure to do so during installation work may result in the unit falling and causing accidents.
1
C : 3P177351-2D

• Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried
out by qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations and this installation manual.
An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire.
• Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires are used, and that there is no strain on the terminal
connections or wires.
Improper connections or securing of wires may result in abnormal heat build-up or fire.
• When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position the
wires so that the terminal box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the terminal box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
• If refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant comes into contact with fire.
• After completing installation, check for refrigerant gas leakage.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas leaks into the room and comes into contact with a source
of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
• Be sure to switch off the unit before touching any electrical parts.
• Be sure to earth the air conditioner.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks.
• Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks or fire.
CAUTION
• While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping to ensure proper drainage and
insulate piping to prevent condensation.
Improper drain piping may result in indoor water leakage and property damage.
• Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions
or radios to prevent picture interference and noise.
(Depending on the incoming signal strength, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient to eliminate noise.)
• Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can be shorter than expected in rooms with electronic
fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
Install the indoor unit as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
• Do not install the air conditioner in the following locations:
1. Where there is a high concentration of mineral oil spray or vapour (e.g. a kitchen).
Plastic parts will deteriorate, parts may fall off and water leakage could result.
2. Where corrosive gas, such as sulphurous acid gas, is produced.
Corroding of copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
3. Near machinery emitting electromagnetic radiation.
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of
the unit.
4. Where flammable gas may leak, where there is carbon fibre or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or
where volatile flammables such as paint thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in fire.
2
3P177351-2D

2. BEFORE INSTALLATION
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening
Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect
refrigerant will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
• When opening the unit or moving it after opening, be sure to lift it by holding on to the lifting lugs without
exerting any pressure on other parts, especially, drain piping, and other resin parts. 2
• Decide upon a line of transport.
• Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Use a sling of soft mate-
rial, where unpacking is unavoidable or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage
or scratches to the unit.
• Refer to the installation manual of the outdoor unit for items not described in this manual.
• Do not dispose of any parts necessary for installation until the installation is complete.
1. PRECAUTIONS
• Be sure to read this manual before installing the indoor unit.
• When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
• This unit is suitable for installation in a household, commercial and light industrial environment.
• Do not install or operate the unit in rooms mentioned below.
• Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may deteriorate.)
• Where corrosive gas like sulfurous gas exists. (Copper tubing and brazed spots may corrode.)
• Where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline is used.
• Where machines can generate electromagnetic waves. (Control system may malfunction.)
• Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates
greatly such as that in factories. Also in vehicles or vessels.
2. ACCESSORIES
Check the following accessories are included with your unit.

(3) Washer for
(5) Paper pattern for
Name (1) Drain hose (2) Metal clamp hanger (4) Clamp (6) Screw (M4)
installation
bracket
Quantity 1 pc. 1 pc. 8 pcs. 6 pcs. 1 pc. 4 pcs.
Also used as pack- For paper pattern

ing material for installation
Shape
(7) Washer Insulation for

Name Sealing pad Installation guide
fixing plate fitting
Quantity 4 pcs. 1 each 1 each 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.
(10) Large (Other)
(8) for gas (13) Small • Installation

pipe manual
(11) Medium-1 (14) (15) • Operation
Shape manual
(9) for liquid
pipe
(12) Medium-2
3
3P177351-2D

3. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
• The optional decoration panel and remote controller are required for this indoor unit. (Refer to Table 1, 2)
(However, the remote controller is not required for the slave unit of a simultaneous operation system.)
Table 1
Unit model Optional decoration panel
BYCP125K-W1
FCQ71·100·125·140KVEA
Color : Fresh White
• These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from Table 2
according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 2
Remote controller
Wired type BRC1C61 / BRC1D61
Wireless type BRC7F632F
NOTE
• If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in “Table 2” on page 4, select a suitable remote con-
troller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
1. Items to be checked after completion of work

Items to be checked If not properly done, what is likely to occur Check
Are the indoor unit and outdoor unit fixed
The unit may drop, vibrate or make noise.
firmly?
The unit may malfunction or the compo-
Is the outdoor unit fully installed?
nents burn out.
Is the gas leak test finished? It may result in insufficient cooling.
Is the unit fully insulated? Condensate water may drip.
Does drainage flow smoothly? Condensate water may drip.
Does the power supply voltage correspond The unit may malfunction or the compo-
to that shown on the name plate? nents burn out.
Are wiring and piping correct?
nents burn out.
Is the unit safely grounded? It may result in electric shock.
Is wiring size according to specifications?
nents burn out.
Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet
It may result in insufficient cooling.
of either the indoor or outdoor units?
Are refrigerant piping length and additional The refrigerant charge in the system is not
refrigerant charge noted down? clear.
2. Items to be checked at time of delivery

* Also review the “1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS”
Items to be checked Check
Are the terminal box lid, air filter, suction grille attached?
Did you explain about operations while showing the instruction manual to your customer?
Did you hand the instruction manual over to your customer?
4
C : 3P177351-2D

Points for explanation about operations
The items with WARNING and CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items per-
taining to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of
the product. Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described con-
tents and also ask your customers to read the instruction manual.
2
4. NOTE TO THE INSTALLER
Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different
functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the
manual.
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE

〈Hold the unit by the 4 lifting lugs when opening the box and moving it, and do not exert pressure on to any
other part piping (refrigerant, drain, etc.) or plastic parts.
If the temperature or humidity inside the ceiling might rise above 30°C or RH 80%, respectively, use the high-
humidity kit (sold separately) or add extra insulation to the main unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation and make sure it is at least 10mm thick and fits inside the
ceiling opening.〉
The direction this product blows can be selected. However, a separately sold shut-off material kit is
needed in order to make the unit blow in two, three, or four (corner shut-off) directions.
(1) Select an installation location with the customer’s approval which matches the following conditions.
• A location from which cool (warm) air will reach the whole room.
• A location with no objects blocking the air passage.
• A location where drainage can be done with no problem.
• A location strong enough to support the weight of the indoor unit.
• Locations where the wall is not significantly tilted.
• A location which leaves enough room for installation and service work.
• A location where there is no risk of flammable gas leaking.
• A location where the length of the indoor-outdoor piping is no longer than the tolerated length (see the
installation manual that came with the outdoor unit for details).
[Space required for installation]
*≥1500
*≥1500
H
Air
discharge Air Air
At least 1800mm inlet discharge
from the floor. ≥1500 ≥1500
Floor surface *≥1500

*≥1500
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Model H
FCQ71KVEA 256
FCQ100·125·140KVEA 298
5
C : 3P177351-2D

CAUTION
• The indoor and outdoor units and the power supply wiring and remote controller cord must be installed
at least 1m away from any televisions or radios. This is to prevent interference with picture and sound
reception. (Interference may occur even at 1m away depending on the reception quality.)
• If installing the wireless kit, the distance of the signal sent from the remote controller might be shorter if
there are fluorescent lights which are electrically started (such as with inverters, rapid starters, etc.) in
the room. The indoor unit should be installed as far away from fluorescent lights as possible.
(2) Ceiling height

This product can be installed in ceilings up to 3.5m high (4.2m high for the 100, 125, and 140).
If the ceiling height is 2.7m (3.2m for the 100,125, and 140) or more, field settings will have to be made with
the remote controller. See “11. FIELD SETTING” for details.
(3) Air direction
The air direction shown in Fig. 3 is an example.
Select the appropriate number of directions according to the shape of the room and the location of the unit.
(Field settings have to be made using the remote controller and the outlet vents have to be shut off if two,
three, or four (corner shut-off) directions are selected. See the shut-off materials (sold separately) instal-
lation manual for details.)
(4) Use eyebolts for installation. Check if the location for the installation is strong enough to support the weight
of the unit, reinforce it if necessary, and install using eyebolts. (The spacing of the installation is shown on
the “paper pattern for installation (5)”.)
[Air direction]
Pipes
Pipes
Pipes
All-round air Pipes

Four air direction Three air direction Two air direction
Fig. 3
6
3P177351-2D

4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION

(1) Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position.
Refrigerant
860 – 910 (Ceiling opening)
950 (Decoration panel)
780 (Suspension bolt pitch)

piping
2
840 (Indoor unit)
Hanger
Suspension bracket
bolt (×4) False
ceiling
710(Suspension bolt pitch)
125 – 130
840 (Indoor unit) View as seen from A
860 – 910 (Ceiling opening) Fig. 5
950 (Decoration panel)
Fig. 4
䡵 Installation is possible when ceiling opening dimensions is as follows

• When installing the unit within the frame for fixing false ceiling.
860
(Opening dimension inside
(Dimension inside frame)
Frame the flame for ceiling)

False
840
910
ceiling
≥20 860 – *910 ≥20

840 (Ceiling opening dimension) (Ceiling-panel
910
(Dimension inside frame) overlapping dimension)
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
NOTE
• Installation is possible with a ceiling dimension of 910mm (marked with *). However, to achieve a ceiling-
panel overlapping dimension of 20mm, the spacing between the ceiling and the unit should be 35mm or
less. If the spacing between ceiling and the unit is over 35mm, attach ceiling material to part or recover
the ceiling.
Ceiling material
≥ 35 ≥ 35
Fig. 8
7
3P177351-2D

(2) Make the ceiling opening needed for installation where applicable. (For existing ceilings)
• Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimensions.
• Create the ceiling opening required for installation. From the side of the opening to the casing outlet,
implement the refrigerant and drain piping and wiring for remote controller (unnecessary for wireless
type) and indoor-outdoor unit casing outlet. Refer to “6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK”, “7. DRAIN
PIPING WORK” and “8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK”.
• After making an opening in the ceiling, it may be necessary to reinforce ceiling beams to keep the ceiling
level and to prevent it from vibrating. Consult the builder for details.
(3) Install the suspension bolts.

<installation example>
(Use either a M8~M10 size bolt)
Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and Ceiling slab
a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field
50 – 100
Anchor
supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce Long nut or turn-buckle
the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
Suspension bolt
Adjust clearance (50 – 100mm) from the
ceiling before proceeding further. False ceiling
Fig. 9
NOTE
• All the above parts are field supplied.
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

Installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel) before installing the indoor unit is
easier. However, for existing ceilings, install fresh air inlet component kit and branch duct before
installing the unit.
As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
(1) For new ceilings

(1-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
• Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix it securely by using a nut and
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of the hanger bracket.
The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.
Field supply
Washer (3) (accessory)
Insert
Hanger bracket
Tighten Washer fixing plate (7)
(double nuts) (accessory)
[Securing the hanger bracket]
[Securing the washer]
Fig. 10 Fig. 11
(1-2)Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimension.
Consult the builder or carpenter for details.
• The center of the ceiling opening is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
The center of the unit is indicated on the triangular mark to the unit bottom and on the paper pattern for
installation.
• Fix the paper pattern to the unit with screws (6) (×4).
• Ceiling height is shown on the side of the paper pattern for installation (5). Adjust the height of the unit
according to this indication.
8
3P177351-2D

Please perform one of the following, as the shape of the paper pattern for installation differs accord-
ing to the model.
Center of main unit Center of

ceiling opening
Center mark of
main unit Paper pattern for 2
installation (5)
Screw (6)
Screw (6) (accessory)
(accessory)
Fig. 12
[Installation of paper pattern for installation]
<Ceiling work>
(1-3)Adjust the unit to the right position for installation.
(Refer to “4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1)”.)
• Using the Installation guide (15) allows you to check the positions from the underside of the unit to the
lower ceiling surface.
Apply the short

side of the
cut-out section.
Lower ceiling Underside of

surface the unit
Installation guide (15)

(accessory)
(1-4)Check the unit is horizontally level.

• The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float
switch. Verify that it is level by using a level or a water-filled
vinyl tube.
CAUTION
If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float switch may
malfunction and cause water to drip.
(1-5)Remove the washer fixing plate (7) used for preventing the Level Vinyl tube
washer from falling and tighten the upper nut.
(1-6)Remove the paper pattern for installation (5). [Maintaining horizontality]
Fig. 13
(2) For existing ceilings
(2-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Perform step (1-1) in (1) For new ceilings.
(2-2)Adjust the height and position of the unit.
(Refer to “4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1)” and (1-3) in (1) For new ceilings.)
(2-3)Perform steps (1-4), (1-5) in (1) For new ceilings.
9
3P177351-2D

6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK

〈For refrigerant piping of outdoor units, see the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.〉
〈Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, a
water leakage can result sometimes.〉
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120°C, so use
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.)
〈Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30°C or
RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20mm or thicker) Condensate may form on the surface of the
insulating material.〉
〈Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect refrig-
erant will prevent normal operation of the unit.)〉
CAUTION
• Use a pipe cutter and flare suitable for the type of refrigerant.
• Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare section before connecting.
• To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end or cover
it with tape.
• Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant circuit, such
as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room thoroughly right away.
• Do not mix air or other gas with the specified refrigerant in the refrig-
eration cycle. Torque wrench
• Ventilate the room if refrigerant gas leaks during the work.
• The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant.
• Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as shown in the Spanner
drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/from the unit.
(Refer to Fig. 14) Pipe union
• Refer to “Table 3” for the dimensions of flare nut spaces.
Flare nut
Fig. 14
• When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil or ether oil to the flare
section (only inside), and spin 3-4 times before screwing in. Coat the flare section (only inside)
(Refer to Fig. 15) with ester or ether oil.
• Keep all the screw mounting resin parts (e.g., piping presser
plates) away from oil.
If oil adheres, the strength of the screw mounting resin parts may
drop.
Fig. 15
CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the
refrigerant to leak.
NOTE
• Use the flare nut included with the unit main body.
Table 3
Flare dimensions
Pipe size Tightening torque Flare
A (mm)
45˚±2˚
φ 9.5 (3/8”) 32.7 – 39.9 N·m 12.8 – 13.2

R0.4-0.8
90˚±2˚
φ 15.9 (5/8”) 61.8 – 75.4 N·m 19.3 – 19.7
• Refer to “Table 3” to determine the proper tightening torque.
10
C : 3P177351-2D

Not recommendable but in case of emergency

You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may
follow the installation method mentioned below.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque
suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below: 2
Pipe size Further tightening angle Recommended arm length of tool
φ 9.5 (3/8”) 60 to 90 degrees Approx. 200mm
φ 15.9 (5/8”) 30 to 60 degrees Approx. 300mm
After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no gas leak.
• Make absolutely sure to execute heat insulation works on the pipe-connecting section after checking gas
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for
fitting (8) and (9). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).) (Refer to Fig. 16)
• Wrap the sealing pad (11) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side. (Refer to Fig. 16)
Gas Piping Insulation Procedure

Insulation for fitting (8) Wrap over from the
(accessory) base of the unit to
Piping insulation the top of the flare
Flare nut connection material (main unit) nut connection.
Turn seams up Attach to base
Main unit
Piping insulation Clamp (4) (accessory) Sealing pad
material medium-1 (11)
(Field supply) Tighten the part other
than the piping insulation (accessory)
material.
Liquid Piping Insulation Procedure

Insulation for fitting (9) Wrap the
(accessory) insulator around
Piping insulation the part from the
Flare nut connection material (main unit) root.
Gas piping
Attach to base
Turn seams up Liquid piping
Main unit
Screw mounting part
Piping insulation Clamp (4) (accessory) Sealing pad
material medium-2 (12) of piping presser plate
(Field supply) Tighten the part other (accessory) (2 locations)
than the piping insulation
material. Fig. 16
CAUTION
For local insulation, be sure to insulate local piping all the way into the pipe connections inside the machine.
Exposed piping may cause condensation or burns on contact.
CAUTION
CAUTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN BRAZING REFRIGERANT PIPING
“Do not use flux when brazing refrigerant piping. Therefore, use the phosphor copper brazing filler metal
(BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P-710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.”
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the
refrigerant oil.)
11
3P177351-2D

• Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping, and
could cause system malfunction.
• When brazing the refrigerant piping, only begin brazing after having carried out nitrogen substitution or
while inserting nitrogen into the refrigerant piping. Once this is done, connect the indoor unit with a flared
or a flanged connection.
• Nitrogen should be set to 0.02MPa with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting nitrogen into
the piping. (Refer to Fig. 17)
Pressure-reducing valve
Refrigerant piping Taping
Part to be Hands valve
brazed
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 17
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK

(1) Rig drain piping
• As for drain work, perform piping in such a manner that water can be drained properly.
• Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section) than
that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 25mm, outside diameter 32mm).
• Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from
forming.
• If the drain pipe cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, execute the drain raising piping.
• To keep the drain pipe from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5m.
Hanger bracket 1–1.5m 1/100 gradient or more
GOOD WRONG
Fig. 18-1 Fig. 18-2
CAUTION
Water pooling in the drainage piping can cause the drain to clog.
• Use the attached drain hose (1) and Metal clamp (2).
• Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the Metal clamp securely within the
portion of a white tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the Metal clamp until the screw head is less than
4mm from the hose.
• Wrap the attached sealing pad (10) over the Metal clamp and drain hose to insulate.
• Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water leak-
age due to dew condensation.
• Indoor drain pipe
• Drain socket
Metal Metal
clamp (2) clamp (2) Large sealing pad (10)
(accessory) (accessory)
Drain hose (1)

Tape (White)
Fig. 19 Fig. 20 ≥ 4mm
12
3P177351-2D

<PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING>

• Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 675mm.
The drain pump of this unit has a high delivery flow rate. Therefore, the higher the drain raising height is, the
lower the sound of draining will be. For this reason, a minimum drain raising height of 300mm is recommended.
• Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300mm from the unit.
Ceiling slab 2
Drain hose (1)
≥ 300mm 1 – 1.5m Hanger bracket
(accessory)
Level or Adjustable
tilted (≥ 675)
≥ 850
slightly up
175
Drain raising pipe
To prevent air bubbles in the Raising section
drain hose part, keep it level or Metal clamp
(accessory) (2) Drain hose (accessory) (1)
slightly tilted up. Any bubbles in
the hose might cause the unit Fig. 21
to make noise due to backflow
when the drain pump stops.
NOTE
• To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (1), do not bend or twist when install-
ing. (This may cause leakage.)
• If converging multiple drain pipes, install according to the procedure shown below.
Central drain pipe
0 – 675mm
The drain pipe should have a downward

slope of at least 1/100 to prevent
air pockets from forming.
Water accumulating in the drain
piping can cause the drain to clog.
Fig. 22
Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit.
(2) After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED

• Add approximately 1000cc of water slowly from the air outlet and check drainage flow.
• Check drainage flow during COOL running, explained under ‘‘12. TEST OPERATION’’.
• Refer to the figure on the following after checking the draining of water, and mount the thermal insulation
material for drainage (14) and thermal insulate the drain socket.
Thermal insulation Sealing pad (Large) (10)

material for drainage (14) Be sure to lay the sealing
(accessory) material on (14).
Thermal insulation Make sure that there

material for drainage (14) is no clearance.
(accessory)
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED

CAUTION
• Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified electrician.
• If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after the
test run is complete.
13
3P177351-2D

• Remove the terminal box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50Hz 240V) to con-
nections No.1 and No.2 on the terminal block for wiring the units. Do not connect to No.3 of the terminal
block for wiring the units. (The drain pump will not operate.) Connect the ground wire firmly. When carrying
out wiring work around the terminal box, make sure none of the connectors come undone. Be sure to attach
the terminal box lid before turning on the power.
• Put approximately 1000cc of water into the drain pan through the blow-off mouth on the left-hand side of the
drain socket. Make sure not to pour water over the drain pump or any electric parts including those of the
drain pump.
• When the power is turned on, the drain pump will operate and you can check the draining of water through
the transparent part of the drain socket. (The drain pump will stop automatically in 10 minutes.)
After checking the draining of water, mount the thermal insulation material for drainage (14) and thermal
insulate the drain socket.
• After confirming drainage (Fig.23, Fig.24), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
• Attach the terminal box lid as before.
Drain sockets
(Check the
drainage now.) Drain pump
location
At least
100mm
Service drain outlet (with rubber plug)

(Use this outlet to drain water from
Plastic watering can the drain pan.)
(Tube should be
about 100mm long.)
<Adding water through air discharge outlet>
[Method of adding water] Fig. 23
Inter-unit wiring
terminal block
Power supply
single phase 240V
Ground
wire 3 2 1
3 2 1
Terminal box lid
Fig. 24
14
3P177351-2D

CAUTION
Drain piping connections
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sew-
age might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
2
8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK
• All field supplied parts and materials and electric works must conform to local codes.
• Use copper wire only.
• For electric wiring work, refer to also “WIRING DIAGRAM” attached to the unit body.
• For remote controller wiring details, refer to the installation manual attached to the remote controller.
• All wiring must be performed by an authorized electrician.
• A circuit breaker capable of shutting down power supply to the entire system must be installed.
• Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for the size of power supply electric wire con-
nected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
• Be sure to ground the air conditioner.
• Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, plumbing pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
• Gas pipes: might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
• Plumbing: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
• Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
during lighting storms.
• Specifications for field wire

The remote control cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 4 when preparing one.
Table 4
2
Wire Size (mm ) Length
Wiring the units H05VV – U4G (NOTE 1) 2.5 –
Remote controller cord Vinyl cord with sheath or cable NOTE 2 (2 wire) 0.75 – 1.25 Max. 500m *
*This will be the total extended length in the system when doing group control.
NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection.
2. Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
Connection of wiring between units, ground wire and for the remote controller cord (Refer to Fig. 25)
• Wiring the units and ground wire
Remove the terminal box lid and connect wires of matching number to the terminal block for wiring the units
(4 P) inside. And connect the ground wire to the ground terminal. In doing this, pull the wires inside through
the hole and fix the wires securely with the included clamp (4).
• Remote controller cords (not necessary for slave unit of simultaneous operation system)
Remove the terminal box lid and pull the wires inside through the hole and connect to the terminal block for
remote controller (4 P). (no polarity) Securely fix the remote controller cord with the included clamp (4).
• After connection, attach sealing pad (13).
• Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water from the outside.
15
3P177351-2D

Remote Transmission
Remote controller cord controller wiring
(weak electric)
Wiring
Inter-unit wiring through-holes P1 P2 F1 F2
Ground wire Approximately Sheaths

7mm
Peel back
the sheath 10 – 15mm
on the power 70 – 90mm Clamp (4)
line and twist. Length of
Cut off any excess
sheath to material after
peel back tightening.
Inter-unit wiring
terminal block (4P)
Remote
controller
wiring
Wiring
through-holes
Clamping position
Inter-unit Secure the ground wire
wiring sheath and inter-unit wiring with Remote
both edges aligned.
controller
Ground wire wiring terminal
block
(Length of sheath to peel back)
Ground Clamp (4)

wire (P1 • P2)
80~100mm
Cut off any

10~15mm
3 2 1 Terminal box lid

excess
3 2 material after
1
Electrical Wiring
tightening the Diagram Nameplate
inter-unit wiring
and ground (Inside of terminal box lid)
Ground terminal wire together.
<<Inter-unit wiring (strong electric) / ground wire>>
Fig. 25
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
CAUTION
• When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the
wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the terminal box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
• When attaching the terminal box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
• After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (pro-
cured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in, they
could cause short circuits in the terminal box.)
• Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller cord) and strong wiring (interunit,
ground, and other power wiring) at least 50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
16
C : 3P177351-2D

Processing method of wiring through-holes
Inter-unit wiring,
ground wire, or remote
controller cord Wiring through-holes 2
Sealing pad (Small) (13)
Putty or thermal
insulation material
(procured locally)
• Use a round crimp-style terminal with insulation sleeve for connection to the terminal block for wiring the
units.
Attach insulation sleeve
Round crimp-style terminal

Fig. 26 Electric wire
When none are available, follow the instructions below.
• Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal.
Connect wires of the Do not connect wires Do not connect wires

same gauge to both of the same gauge to of different gauges.
side. one side.
Fig. 27
(Looseness in the connection may cause overheating.)
• In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires so
that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
• Use the correct screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws. If the blade of screwdriver is too small, the
head of the screw might be damaged, and the screw will not be properly tightened.
• If the terminal screw are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
Tightening torque (N·m)
Terminal block for remote controller 0.79 to 0.97
Terminal block for wiring the units 1.18 to 1.44
9. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor units, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor units.
Confirm the system type.
• Pair type: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system) (Refer to Fig. 28)
• Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to the
remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 29)
• 2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 30)
17
3P177351-2D

Pair type Group control

Main power supply Main power supply Main power supply Main power supply
Main switch Main switch Main switch Main switch
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
P1 P2 P1 P2
Remote controller
(Optional accessory)
Remote controller Fig. 29
(Optional accessory)
Fig. 28
2 remote controllers control

Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2 P1 P2
Remote Remote
controller controller
(Slave)
(Optional accessories) Fig. 30
NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal symbol.
2. In case of group control, perform the remote controller wiring to the master unit when connecting to the
simultaneous operation system. (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary)
3. For group control remote controller, choose the remote controller that suits the indoor unit which has the
most functions (as attached swing flap)
18
C : 3P177351-2D

10. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL

Caution:
With a wireless remote controller, field setting and test operation cannot be performed without attach-
ing the decoration panel.
<If performing a test run without attaching the decoration panel, read “11. FIELD SETTING” and “12. TEST
OPERATION” first.> 2
Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration
panel.
11. FIELD SETTING

CAUTION
When performing field setting or test operation without attaching the decoration panel, do not
touch the drain pump. This may cause electric shock.
• Check that the outdoor unit has been wired properly.

Make sure the terminal box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
Field setting must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation conditions.
• Setting can be made by changing the “Mode No.”, “FIRST CODE NO.” and “SECOND CODE NO.”.
• For setting procedures and instructions, see “Field settings” provided with the remote controller.
11-1 Setting ceiling height

• Select the SECOND CODE NO. that corresponds to the ceiling height “Table 5”.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01”.)
Table 5
FCQ - KVEA
Mode No. FIRST SECOND
100·125· Note) 1 CODE NO. CODE NO.
71 type
140 type
Standard · All
≤ 2.7 ≤ 3.2 01
Ceiling round outlet
13 (23) 0
height (m) High ceiling 1 2.7 - 3 3.2 - 3.6 02
High ceiling 2 3 - 3.5 3.6 - 4.2 03
Note:
1. “Mode No.” setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an individual unit, set
the internal mode number in parentheses.
2. The figure of the ceiling height is for the all round outlet. For the settings for four-direction (part of corner
closed off), three-direction and two-direction outlets, see the installation manual and technical guide sup-
plied with the separately sold closure material kit.
11-2 Setting of air direction

• See the installation manual included with the sealing material of air discharge outlet kit, sold separately and
technical guide, for ceiling height settings for two and three-direction air discharge. (The SECOND CODE
NO. is factory set to “01” (all round outlet) before shipping.)
11-3 Settings for Mounting Options

• When installing an option sold separately, refer to the installation manual provided to the option.
19
C : 3P177351-2D

11-4 Setting air filter sign

• Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filter signs to display the time to clean air filters.
• Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to “Table 6” depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the
room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” for filter contamination-light.)
Table 6
Spacing time of display air filter FIRST CODE SECOND
Setting Mode No.
sign (long life type) NO. CODE NO.
Air filter contamination-
Approx. 2500 hrs 01
light
0
Air filter contamination- 10 (20)
Approx. 1250 hrs
heavy 02
No Display 3
Note:
1. “Mode No.” setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an individual unit, set
the internal mode number in parentheses.
2. Make settings for “No Display” in cases where no cleaning display is required, e.g., at the time of regular
maintenance servicing.
• The air conditioner is provided with a long life filter as a standard accessory. Explain to the customer the
necessity of cleaning the filter periodically along with the set time for filter cleaning for the prevention of
clogging.
When using wireless remote controllers

• When using wireless remote controllers, wireless remote controller address setting is necessary. Refer to
the installation manual attached to the wireless remote controller for setting instructions.
11-5 When implementing group control

• When using as a pair unit, you may start/stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
• In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote con-
troller.
• Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as possible.
Outdoor unit 1 Outdoor unit 2 Outdoor unit 3
Indoor unit 1 Indoor unit 2 Indoor unit 3
Group control remote controller

Fig. 31
Wiring Method
(1) Remove the terminal box lid. (See ‘‘8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK’’.)
(2) Cross-wire the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) inside the terminal box. (There is no
polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 29 and Table 4)
11-6 Control by 2 Remote Controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)

• When using 2 remote controllers, one must be set to “MAIN” and the other to “SUB”.
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and, work-
ing from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper
part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 32)
(2) Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC boards to “S”. (Leave the
switch of the other remote controller set to “M”.) (Refer to Fig. 33)
20
3P177351-2D

Upper part of
remote controller S
(Factory setting) M
Remote
controller
(Only one remote
controller needs
S
M
PC board 2
Lower part of to be changed if
remote controller factory settings
Insert the screwdriver here have remained
and gently work off the untouched.)
upper part of remote controller. Fig. 32 Fig. 33
Wiring Method (See ‘‘8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK’’.)

(3) Remove the terminal box lid.
(4) Add remote controller 2 (slave) to the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) in the terminal
box. (There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 30 and Table 4)
12. TEST OPERATION

CAUTION
When performing field setting or test operation without attaching the decoration panel, do not
touch the drain pump. This may cause electric shock.
Refer to the section of “FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUC-
TION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.” .
• After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation
accordingly to protect the unit.
• Check that the outdoor unit has been wired properly.
• Check that the terminal box lid of the indoor unit is closed and that the outer plate and piping cover of the
outdoor unit are closed as well.
• Clean the decoration panel and interior of the indoor unit on completion of refrigerant piping, drain piping,
and electric wiring work.
• Refer to the installation manual provided to the outdoor unit, and perform the test operation of the air conditioner.
• If the decoration panel is mounted at the time of test operation, check the operation of the swing flap of the
decoration panel.
• If the interior finishing work has been still on the way on completion of test operation, explain to the cus-
tomer not to operate the air conditioner for the protection of the indoor unit until the interior finishing work
is completed.
If the air conditioner is operated, substances generated from the paint and glue of the interior finishing will
contaminate the indoor unit, thus resulting in water splashing or leakage.
• If an error occurs and the air conditioner does not operate, refer to the following troubleshooting information.
• On completion of test operation, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button to set the air condi-
tioner to “ ” mode and check that the error code is set to “00” (=normal).
If the error code is other than “00”, refer to the following troubleshooting information.
• The air conditioner will return to normal run mode if the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button is pressed
four times.
• Perform the trial operation of the air conditioner after mounting the decoration panel if the wireless remote
controller is used.
Mode change Four times
Normal operation Test run
Once
Once On
Fo ce
(4 s min.) Once ur
tim
es
Field settings Inspection
21
C: 3P177351-2D

PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is “00”. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than “00”, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
NOTE
• If a malfunction is preventing operation, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
12-1 Cautions for servicing

With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller.
• If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner.
a malfunction shown in the table below may happened.
Remote controller display Malfunction
• Power supply trouble or Open phase connection
• Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
• Indoor PC board faulty
No display
• Wrong remote controller connection wiring
• Remote controller faulty
• Fuse faulty
88*
88 flashing • Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
*After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display “88”. This is not a
problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
■ Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and “ ” and the Malfunction code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referring to the table
on the Malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit no with
the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
2. With the wireless remote controller.
(Refer also to the operation manual attached to the wireless remote controller)
When the operation stops due to trouble, the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diagnose
the fault contents with the table on the Malfunction code list looking for the Malfunction code which can be
found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1) Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button, “ ” is displayed and “ 0 ” flashes.
(2) Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps Perform all the following operations
1 short beep Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep No trouble
(3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper code.
(5) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
• A long beep indicate the Malfunction code.
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,
“ ” starts flashing and changes the inspection mode.
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble his-
tory disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code “00”(normal).
The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.
Caution:
Check the items in “2. Items to be checked at time of delivery” on page 4 after a test operation.
22
C: 3P177351-2D

12-2 Malfunction code list

• For places where the Malfunction code is left blank, the “ ” indication is not displayed. Though the system
continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
• Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the Malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
Code Malfunction/Remarks
A0 Safety device operates 2
A1 Indoor unit’s PC board faulty
A3 Drain water level abnormal
A6 Indoor fan motor overloaded, overcurrent or locked
AF Humidifier faulty
Air cleaner faulty
AH
Only the air cleaner does not function.
Type set improper
AJ
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
C4 Sensor for heat exchanger temperature is fault
C9 Sensor for suction air temperature is fault
CC Humidity sensor abnormal
Sensor for remote controller is fault
CJ The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is
possible.
E0 Action of safety device (outdoor unit)
E1 Outdoor unit’s PC board faulty
E3 High pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
E4 Low pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
E5 Compressor motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan motor lock malfunction
E7
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction
E9 Electronic expansion valve faulty (outdoor unit)
F3 Discharge pipe temperature abnormal (outdoor unit)
H3 High pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
H4 Low pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
H7 Outdoor motor position signal malfunction
Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
H9
Equipment operation in response to errors will vary according to model.
JA Discharge pipe pressure sensor faulty (outdoor unit)
JC Suction pipe pressure sensor faulty (outdoor unit)
J1 Pressure sensor system error (batch) (outdoor unit)
J2 Power sensor system error (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J3
J5 Suction pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J6
J7
J8 Liquid piping temperature sensor system error (outdoor unit)
J9 Intake temperature sensor error (outdoor unit)
23
3P177351-2D

L1 Inverter system error (outdoor unit)

Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor unit)
L4
Inverter cooling defect.
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor unit)
L5
Possible earth fault or short circuit in the compressor motor.
Electric thermal (outdoor unit)
L8
Possible electrical overload in the compressor or cut line in the compressor motor.
Stall prevention (outdoor unit)
L9
Compressor possibly locked.
LC Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units’ inverters (outdoor unit)
P1 Open-phase (outdoor unit)
P3 P-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
P4 Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Type set improper (outdoor unit)
PJ
U0 Suction pipe temperature abnormal
Reverse phase
U1
Reverse two phase of the L1,L2 and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction (outdoor unit)
U2
Includes the defect in 52C.
Transmission error (indoor unit – outdoor unit)
U4
UF Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
Transmission error (indoor unit – remote controller)
U5
Transmission is improper between the indoor unit and the remote controller.
Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controls.
U8
(Malfunction in sub remote controller.)
Miss setting for multi system
UA Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main
unit’s PC board)
UC Central control address overlapping
UJ Peripheral equipment transmission fault
24
C: 3P177351-2D

2.2 FHQ71BVV1B / FHQ100BVV1B / FHQ125BVV1B

k 2
f a
e
e
i
g
d h
d
j
b
d
c e
f
a Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
• The external appearance of the outdoor unit varies
depending on its capacity class.
b The outdoor unit shown in the figure is for refer-
ence to indicate features.
Contact your Daikin Dealer and verify which out-
door unit you have.
c Remote controller
d Inlet air
e Discharged air
f Air outlet
g Air flow flap (at air outlet)
i Drain pipe
Suction grille
j
The built-in air filter removes dust and dirt.
Ground wire
k Wire to ground from the outdoor unit to prevent elec-
trical shocks.
3PN07753-4E

2.2.2 Installation
FHQ35BVV1B
FHQ50BVV1B
FHQ60BVV1B
SPLIT SYSTEM
FHQ71BVV1B Air Conditioner
FHQ100BVV1B Installation manual
FHQ125BVV1B
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...............................................................................................1
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................3
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE................................................................................5
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION .................................................................6
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION .....................................................................................8
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK ....................................................................................9
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK .................................................................................................13
8. WIRING EXAMPLE ......................................................................................................15
9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK .........................................................................................16
10. FIELD SETTINGS ........................................................................................................19
11. TEST OPERATION ......................................................................................................21
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read these “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be
sure to install it correctly.
After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer how to
operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the customer to store
the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term “appliances not accessible to the general public”.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or per-
sonal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
English 1
C : 3PN06588-3H

An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire. 2
wires so that the control box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
CAUTION
Install the indoor unit as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of
the unit.
• The air conditioner is not intended for use in a potentially explosive atmosphere.
2 English
3PN06588-3H

• When moving the unit while removing it from the carton box, be sure to lift it by holding on to the
four lifting lugs without exerting any pressure on other parts, especially swing flap, the refrigerant
piping, drain piping, and other resin parts.
• Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect refrigerant
will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
• The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is com-
pleted. Do not discard them!
• Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Where unpacking is
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid dam-
age or scratches to the unit.
• When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
• For the installation of an outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
• Do not use the unit in locations with high salt content in the air such as beachfront property, locations where
the voltage fluctuates such as factories, or in automobiles or marine vessels.
2-1 ACCESSORIES
Check the following accessories are included with your unit.

3) Washer for 5) Paper pattern
Name 1) Drain hose 2) Clamp 4) Clamp
hanger bracket for installation
Quan-
1 pc. 1 pc. 8 pcs. 6 pcs. 1 pc.
tity
Shape
Name Insulation for fitting Sealing pad

Quan-
1 each. 1 each.
tity (Other)
6) For gas pipe 8) Large
Operation manual
Installation manual
Shape
7) For liquid pipe 9) Small
2-2 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

• The remote controller are required for this indoor unit “Table 1” on page 3.
(However, the remote controller is not required for the slave unit of a simultaneous operation system.)
• These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from
“Table 1” on page 3 according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 1
Remote controller type Cooling only type Heat pump type
Wired type BRC1C517, BRC1D527, BRC1D528, BRC1C61
Wireless type BRC7E66, BRC7EA66 BRC7E63W, BRC7EA63W
English 3
3PN06588-3H

NOTE
• If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in “Table 1” on page 3, select a suitable remote con-
troller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
2
a. Items to be checked after completion of work
Items to be checked If not properly done, what is likely to occur Check
Are the indoor and outdoor unit fixed firmly? The units may drop, vibrate or make noise.
Is the gas leak test finished? It may result in insufficient cooling.
Is the unit fully insulated? Condensate water may drip.
Does drainage flow smoothly? Condensate water may drip.
Does the power supply voltage correspond The unit may malfunction or the compo-
to that shown on the name plate? nents burn out.
nents burn out.
Is the unit safely grounded? Dangerous at electric leakage.
nents burn out.
Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet
It may result in insufficient cooling.
of either the indoor or outdoor units?
b. Items to be checked at time of delivery

∗ Also review the “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”
Did you explain about operations while showing the instruction manual to your customer?
Did you hand the instruction manual over to your customer?
c. Points for explanation about operations
The items with WARNING and CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items pertaining
to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask
your customers to read the instruction manual.
2-3 NOTE TO THE INSTALLER

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different
functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the
manual.
4 English
C: 3PN06588-3H


(1) Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets your cus-
tomer’s approval.
• Where optimum air distribution can be ensured.
• Where nothing blocks air passage.
• Where condensate can be properly drained.
• Where the ceiling is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
• Where the false ceiling is not noticeably on an incline.
• Where there is no risk of flammable gas leakage.
• Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured.
NOTE
• If there is space left over in the ∗ section, opening it up 200 mm will make servicing easier.
∗≥30 ∗≥30 Air outlet
≥300
2500 or higher
Required service Air inlet from the floor
space
Obstruction For installation
Floor in high places
(Length : mm)
• Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit. (Refer to the instal-
lation manual for the outdoor unit.)
• Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televi-
sions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the
noise.)
(2) Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to support the
weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is marked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcing.)
(3) This product may be installed on ceilings up to 3.5 m in height. However, if the ceiling is higher
than 2.7 m, the remote control will have to be set locally. (Refer to “10. FIELD SETTINGS” on page
19)
English 5
3PN06588-3H


(1) Relation of holes for indoor unit, suspension bolt position, piping and wiring.
A
B
C
D
2
160
185
85
E
F G
135
210
160
Front view
680
False ceiling view
260
Top side drain
piping hole
Left side piping hole Rear side piping hole
Top gas piping hole
Suspension
Air outlet bolt (×4)
Top liquid piping hole
(Length : mm)
Model A B C D E F G
Type 35, 45, 50 960 920 390 375 310 400 375
Type 60, 71 1160 1120 490 475 410 500 475
Type 100 1400 1360 610 595 530 620 595
Type 125 1590 1550 705 690 625 715 690
(2) Make holes for suspension bolts, refrigerant and drain piping, and wiring.
• Refer to the paper pattern for installation.
• Select the location for each of holes and open the holes in the ceiling.
(3) Remove the parts from the indoor unit.

(3-1)Detach the suction grille.
• Slide the locking knobs (×2) on the suction grille inward (direction of arrows) and lift upwards.
(Refer to Fig. 1)
• With the suction grille open, remove the suction grille forward, holding on to the rear tabs on the suction
grille. (Refer to Fig. 2)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
(3-2)Remove the dressing boards (left and right). Fig. 3

• After removing the securing screws for the Accessories
dressing boards (one each), pull them forward Dressing board securing
(in the direction of the arrow) and remove screw (M4)
them. (Refer to Fig. 3)
• Take out the accessories.
Dressing board
6 English
3PN06588-3H

(3-3)Remove the hanger brackets.

• Loosen the 2 bolts (M8) used to attach the hanger brackets which are on each side (4 places left and
right) to within 10 mm. (Refer to Fig. 4. 5)
• After removing the securing screws (M5) for the hanger brackets which are on the rear side, pull the
hanger brackets back (in the direction of the arrow), and remove them. (Refer to Fig. 5)
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Hanger bracket
Length of loosening fixing screw (M5)
should be less than Indoor unit
10 mm ≤10 Hanger bracket
setting bolt (M8)
Hanger bracket Hanger bracket
(4) Attach the suspension bolts. (Use suspension bolts which are W3/8 or M8-M10 in size.)
• Adjust the distance of the suspension bolts from the ceiling in advance. (Refer to Fig. 6)
NOTE
• Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field supplied parts
for new ceilings to reinforce the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit. Adjust clearance from the ceiling
before proceeding further.
Fig. 6
Ceiling slab
Anchor
25-55
Suspension bolt
False ceiling
(Length : mm)
All the above parts are field supplied.
English 7
3PN06588-3H


It may be easier to attach accessory parts before installing the indoor unit. Therefore, please also
read the instruction manuals which are provided with the accessory parts.
As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
(1) Secure the hanger brackets to the suspension bolts. (Refer to Fig. 7)
2
NOTE
• To ensure they are safely secured, use the included washers, and secure them with double nuts to make sure.
(2) Lift the indoor unit’s main body, insert the bolts (M8) for the hanger brackets into the attachment
part on the hanger brackets, while sliding the main body from the front. (Refer to Fig. 8)
(3) Fasten the bolts for the hanger brackets (M8) securely in 4 places, left and right. (Refer to Fig. 8)
(4) Replace the screws for the hanger brackets which had been removed (M5) securely in 2 places left
and right. This is necessary to prevent any forward and back slide in the main body of the indoor
unit. (Refer to Fig. 8)
Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Hanger bracket
Nut (Field supplied)

Washer (3) (attached)
Attachment
part
Double nuts (Field supplied) Hanger bracket
setting bolt (M8)
Hanger bracket
Hanger bracket
fixing screw (M5)
(5) When hanging the indoor unit main body, be sure to use a level or a plastic tube with water in it to
make sure the drain piping is set either level or slightly tilted, in order to ensure proper drainage.
(Refer to Fig. 9)
Fig. 9
A A.B
≤ 1˚ ≤ 1˚
B
≤ 1˚
A.When the drain piping is tilted to the right, or to the right and back.
Place it level, or tilt it slightly to the right or the back. (Within 1°.)
B.When the drain piping is tilted to the left, or to the left and back.
Place it level, or tilt it slightly to the left or the back. (Within 1°.)
CAUTION
Setting the unit at an angle opposite to the drain piping might cause a water leakage.
8 English
3PN06588-3H


〈For refrigerant piping of outdoor units, see the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.〉
〈Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping.
Otherwise, a water leakage can result sometimes.〉
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120°C, so use
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.)
〈Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed
30°C or RH80 %, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensation may form on the
surface of the insulating material.〉
〈Before refrigerant piping work, check which type of refrigerant is used. Proper operation is not pos-
sible if the types of refrigerant are not the same.〉
CAUTION
• Use a pipe cutter and flare suitable for the type of refrigerant.
• Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare section before connecting.
• To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end
or cover it with tape.
• Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant
circuit, such as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room
thoroughly right away.
• The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant.
• Use copper alloy seamless pipes (ISO 1337). Fig. 10
• Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as
shown in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes Torque wrench
to/from the unit. (Refer to Fig. 10) Piping union
• Refer to “Table 2” for the dimensions of flare nut spaces.
• When connecting the flare nut, coat the flare section (only
inside) with ester oil or ether oil, rotate three or four times first, Flare nut
then screw in. (Refer to Fig. 11)
Spanner
NOTE
• Use the flare nut included with the unit main body. Fig. 11
CAUTION Coat the flare section (only inside)

with ester oil or ether oil.
Do not let oil get on the screw holders on the dressing board.
Oil can weaken the screw holders.
Table 2
Flare dimensions A (mm)
Type of refrigerant R410A
Applicable model Flare
FHQ
Pipe size Tightening torque
φ6.4(1/4”) 14.2-17.2 N • m 8.7 – 9.1
0
45 ±2
0
φ9.5(3/8”) 32.7-39.9 N • m 12.8 – 13.2

R0.4-0.8
0
90 ±0.5
φ12.7(1/2”) 49.5-60.3 N • m 16.2 – 16.6

0
φ15.9(5/8”) 61.8-75.4 N • m 19.3 – 19.7

φ19.1(3/4”) 97.2-118.8 N • m
• Refer to “Table 2” to determine the proper tightening torque.
CAUTION
Overtightening may damage the flare and cause a refrigerant leakage.
English 9
C : 3PN06588-3H

Not recommendable but in case of emergency
You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may
follow the installation method mentioned below.
After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no gas leak. 2
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque
suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
Pipe size Further tightening angle Recommended arm length of tool
φ6.4 (1/4”) 60 to 90 degrees Approx. 150mm
CAUTION
CAUTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN BRAZING REFRIGERANT PIPING
“Do not use flux when brazing refrigerant piping. Therefore, use the phosphor copper brazing filler metal
(BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P-710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.”
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based flux is
used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the refrigerant oil.)
• Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the
piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping,
and could cause system malfunction.
• When brazing the refrigerant piping, only begin brazing after having carried out nitrogen substitution or
while inserting nitrogen into the refrigerant piping. Once this is done, connect the indoor unit with a flared
or a flanged connection.
• Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 MPa with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting nitrogen into
the piping. (Refer to Fig. 12)
Pressure-reducing valve
Refrigerant piping
Part to be Taping
brazed hands valve
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 12
10 English
3PN06588-3H

• Make absolutely sure to execute heat insulation works on the pipe-connecting section after checking gas
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for fit-
ting (6) and (7). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).)
(Refer to Fig. 13)
• Wrap the sealing pad (9) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side.
(Refer to Fig. 13)
CAUTION
• Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping
may cause condensation or burns if touched.
Fig. 13 Procedure for thermal insulation of gas-side piping

Insulating material for joints (6)
(accessory) Wind around the
Piping insulation pipe, beginning at
Flare nut connection material the base.
Orient so that the end of (main unit) Small seal material
the wrapped insulation Attach to base (9) (accessory)
material is facing up
Main unit
Piping insulation material Clamp (4)
(Locally procured) (accessory)
Insulation for gas pipe (6) (attached)
Gas piping
Liquid piping
Insulation for liquid pipe (7) (attached)
Clamp (4) (attached) (× 4)

Attach to the bottom
(For both gas piping and liquid piping)
Procedure for thermal insulation of liquid-side piping

Insulating material for
joints (7)(accessory)
Flare nut connection
Orient so that the end of Piping insulation material (main unit)
the wrapped insulation
material is facing up Attach to base
Main unit
Piping insulation material
Clamp (4) (accessory)
(Locally procured)
English 11
3PN06588-3H

(1) For piping facing back.

• Remove the rear penetration lid and set the piping. (Refer to Fig. 14.16)
(2) For piping facing up.
• When setting the piping to face up, the L-shaped branch piping kit sold separately is required.
• Removing the top penetration lid and use the L-shaped branch piping kit sold separately to set the piping.
(Refer to Fig. 14.15)
(3) For piping facing right.
2
• Cut out a slit hole on the dressing board (right) and set the piping. (Refer to Fig. 16)
Fig. 14 Fig. 15
Top plate
Cut out
Upward-facing
refrigerant piping
Rear L-shaped branch piping
penetration lid kit (Optional accessories)
Top penetration lid
Cut out
Fig. 17
Fig. 16 Thermistor lead line
Top penetration
lid clamp section Swing motor
Right-facing Rear-facing
refrigerant lead line
refrigerant piping
piping
Rear right-facing
drain piping
Right-facing drain piping
Dressing board (right)
removable part
If only setting the drain piping to
face right, cut this section only.
• When piping is complete, cut the removed penetration lid into the shape of the piping using scissors and attach.
As when before removing the top penetration lid, secure the lead lines for the swing motor and thermistor
by passing them through the clamp section on the top penetration lid. (Refer to Fig. 14.17)
• When doing this, block any gaps between the piping penetration lid and the pipes using putty to prevent
dust from entering the indoor unit.
12 English
3PN06588-3H


(1) Carry out the drain piping.
• Make sure piping provides proper drainage.
• You can select whether to bring the drain piping out from the rear right, right, rear left, or left. For rear right-
facing and right-facing situations, refer to “6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK” on page 9 for rear left-facing
and left-facing situations. (Refer to Fig. 18)
Fig. 18
Rear side (metal plate) Rear left-facing drain piping

removable part
Left dressing board removable part
Left-facing drain piping
• When setting piping facing left, move the rubber stopper and insulation which are attached to the drain pipe
connection hole on the left side of the indoor unit to the right-side drain pipe connection hole.
When doing this, insert the rubber stopper all the way in to prevent a water leakage.
• Make sure the pipe diameter is the same or bigger than the branch piping. (vinyl-chloride piping, nominal
diameter 20 mm, external diameter 26 mm)
• Make sure the piping is short, has at least a 1/100 slope, and can prevent air pockets from forming.
(Refer to Fig. 19)
Fig. 19
Good Wrong Do not lift Make sure there

Tilt down is no slack
Make sure it is
not in the water
CAUTION
Water accumulating in the drain piping can cause the drain to clog.
• Be sure to use the included drain hose (1) and clamp (2).
Also, insert the drain hose completely into the drain socket, and securely attach the clamp bracket inside
the gray tape area on the inserted tip of the drain hose. (Refer to Fig. 20)
Screw the screws on the clamp bracket until there is 4 mm left. (Pay attention to the direction of the attach-
ment to prevent the clamp bracket from coming into contact with the suction grille.)
(Refer to Fig. 21)
English 13
C: 3PN06588-3H

Fig. 20 Clamp (2) (attached) Fig. 22
Taping area (Gray) Drain hose (1) (attached)

Clamp (2)
Wrong 2
(attached)
Fig. 21
Sealing pad (8)
(attached)
≤4
Sealing
pad (8)
≤4
(attached) Clamp (2)

(attached) (Length : mm)
< Facing rear right or right > < Facing rear left or left >
• Insulate the clamp bracket and drain hose from the bottom using the included sealing pad (8).
(Refer to Fig. 21)
• Be sure to insulate all drain piping running indoors.
• Do not allow any slack to gather in the drain hose inside the indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 22)
(Slack in the drain hose can cause the suction grille to break.)
(2) Check to make sure the drain flows smoothly after piping is complete.
• Slowly pour 600 ml of drain-checking water into the drain pan through the air outlet.
Plastic container
for pouring Air outlet
Make sure not to splash the water.

100 mm
or more
Central drain pipe

Set a downward slope of 1/100 or
greater to ensure that air does
not accumulate.
Water accumulating in the drain piping can

cause the drain to clog.
CAUTION
Drain piping connections
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sew-
age might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
14 English
3PN06588-3H

8. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor units, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor units.
• Pair or Multi system: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system) (Refer to Fig. 23)
• Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to the
remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 25)
• Two remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 26)
Fig. 23
Pair or Multi system

Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Remote controller
P1 P2
(Optional accessories)
Fig. 25 Fig. 26
Group control Two remote controllers control
Main power supply Main power supply Main power supply Main power supply
Main switch Main switch Main switch Main switch
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
P1 P2
P 1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P 2
Indoor unit
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
P 1 P2
Remote controller (Optional accessories) P1 P2 P1 P2
Remote Remote
controller 1 controller 2
(Optional (Optional
accessories) accessories)
English 15
C : 3PN06588-3H

NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal symbol.
2. In case of group control, perform the remote controller wiring to the master unit when connecting to the
simultaneous operation system. (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary)
3. For group control remote controller, choose the remote controller that suits the indoor unit which has the
most functions (as attached swing flap)
2

• For electric wiring work, refer to also “8. WIRING EXAMPLE” on page 15 attached to the unit body.
• Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for the size of power supply electric wire con-
nected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
• Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
• Gas pipes: might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
• Water pipes: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
• Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
Table 3
2
H05VV - U4G
Wiring between units 2.5 -
(NOTE 1, 3)
Vinyl cord with sheath or cable Max. 500 m
Remote controller cord 0.75 - 1.25
(2 wires) (NOTE 2) (NOTE 3)
NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection. (Sheath thickness: 1mm or more)
2. Use double insulated wire for remote controller (Sheath thickness: 1mm or more) or run wires through a
wall or conduit so that the user cannot come in contact with them.
3. This length shall be the total extended length in the system of the group control.
CAUTION
• Even if the top or rear penetration lid is removed, pull the remote controller cord and the wiring between
units inside the unit using conduits for each, so that the wiring does not come into contact with the opening
section of the metal casing.
• Pass conduits through the wall and secure along with the refrigerant piping in order to prevent external
pressure being applied to the remote controller cord and wiring between units.
• Prevent dust from entering into the unit by filling the gap between the conduits and the penetration lid (top
or rear) with corking or putty.
• Arrange the wires and fix a lid firmly so that the lid does not float during wiring work.
• Do not clamp remote controller cord together with wiring between units together. Doing so may cause mal-
function.
• Remote controller cord and wiring between units should be located at least 50 mm from other electric wires.
Not following this guideline may result in malfunction due to electrical noise.
16 English
C : 3PN06588-3H

Connection of wiring between units and for the remote control cord (Refer to Fig. 27)
• Wiring between units
Holding the control box lid, loosen the two securing screws, remove the control box lid, match up the phases
on the power source terminal block inside (3P), and make the connections.
After this is done, use the attached clamp (4) to bind wiring between units to the anchor point.
(Refer to Fig. 28)
• Remote controller cord: The simultaneous operation multi sub-unit is not required. (Refer to Fig. 27.29)
Connect to the remote control terminal block (2P). (There is no polarity.) After this is done, use the attached
clamp (4) to bind remote controller cord to the anchor point. (Refer to Fig. 28)
Attaching the suction grille and the dressing boards

• Once wiring is complete, firmly attach the dressing side board by reversing the steps taken to remove the
suction grille.
Fig. 27
Remote control terminal block (2P) Fig. 28
Power supply terminal block (3P) Rear penetration lid
Control box Ground terminal Conduits
Seal with caulking
material or putty
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe
Drain hose
Remote controller cord Wiring between units
Control box lid fixation Wiring between units (If wiring the slave
screw unit, connect to master unit)
Clamp (4) (attached) How to connect power supply terminal
Fig. 28 Fastener block (3P)
Fig. 29
Wiring between
units After securing the
clamp material
P1 P2
to the bracket,
cut off any extra
Clamp (4) material.
(attached) Remote control
Remote controller cord terminal block (2P)
Fastener Remote controller cord
English 17
3PN06588-3H

Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminals.
Tightening torque for the terminal screws.

• Use the correct screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws. If the blade of screwdriver is too small, the
head of the screw might be damaged, and the screw will not be properly tightened.
• If the terminal screws are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
• Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws. 2
Terminal Size Tightening torque
Remote controller terminal block (2P) M3.5 0.79 - 0.97 N•m
Power supply terminal block (3P) M4 1.18 - 1.44 N•m
Ground terminal M4 1.18 - 1.44 N•m
Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring

Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power supply terminal block.
In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instructions.
(Refer to Fig. 30)
• Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection
may cause overheating.) (Refer to Fig. 31)
• When connecting wires of the same gauge, connect them according to. (Refer to Fig. 31)
• In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires so
that external forces are not applied to the terminals.
Fig. 30 Attach insulation sleeve
Round crimp-style terminal

Electric wire
Fig. 31
Connect wires of the Do not connect wires Do not connect wires
same gauge to both of the same gauge to of different gauges.
side. (GOOD) one side. (WRONG) (WRONG)
Good Wrong Wrong
18 English
3PN06588-3H

10. FIELD SETTINGS

(1) Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
(2) Field settings must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation condi-
tions.
• Settings can be made by changing the “Mode No.”, “FIRST CODE NO.” and “SECOND CODE NO.”.
• The “Field Settings” included with the remote control lists the order of the settings and method of operation.
10-1 Setting ceiling height

• Select the SECOND CODE NO. that corresponds to the ceiling height “Table 4”.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” for a ceiling height of less than 2.7m .)
Table 4
Ceiling height (m) Mode No. FIRST CODE NO. SECOND CODE NO.
Less than 2.7 m 01
13 (23) 0
2.7 to 3.5 02
10-2 Settings for options

• For settings for options, see the installation instructions provided with the option.
10-3 Setting air filter sign

• Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air filters.
• Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to “Table 5” depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” for air filter contamination-light.)
Table 5
Spacing time of display air filter FIRST CODE SECOND
Setting Mode No.
sign (long life type) NO. CODE NO.
Approx. 2500 hrs 01
light
10 (20) 0
Approx. 1250 hrs 02
heavy
English 19
C : 3PN06588-3H

10-4 When implementing group control

• When using as a pair unit or as a master unit for simultaneous operation multi, you may simultaneous start/
stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
• In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote con-
troller.
• Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc.) in the group as possible.
2
Outdoor unit 1 Outdoor unit 2 Outdoor unit 3
Indoor unit 1 Indoor unit 2 Indoor unit 3
Group control remote controller
Wiring Method (See “9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK” on page 16.)

(1) Remove the control box lid.
(2) Cross-wire the remote control terminal block (P1 P2) inside the control box. (There is no polarity.)
(Refer to Fig. 25 on page 15 and Table 3 on page 16)
NOTE
• When combining with a simultaneous operation multi-type, be sure only to connect the wiring to the master
unit.
20 English
C : 3PN06588-3H

10-5 Two remote controllers control (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)
• When using 2 remote controllers, one must be set to “MAIN” and the other to “SUB”.
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and, work-
ing from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper
part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 32)
(2) Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC boards to “S”. (Leave the
switch of the other remote controller set to “M”.) (Refer to Fig. 33)
Fig. 32 Upper part of Fig. 33

remote controller
S
(Factory setting) M
Remote
controller
(Only one remote PC board
Lower part of controller needs
S
M
remote controller to be changed if
Insert the screwdriver
here and gently work factory settings
have remained
off the upper part of
untouched.)
remote controller.
Wiring Method (See “9.ELECTRIC WIRING WORK” on page16.)

(3) Remove the control box lid
(4) Add remote controller 2 to the remote control terminal block (P1, P2) in the control box.
(There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 26 on page 15 and Table 3 on page 16)
NOTE
When combining with a simultaneous operation multi-type, be sure only to connect the wiring to the master
unit.
11. TEST OPERATION

(1) Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
(2) Refer to the section of “FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUC-
TION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.” on page 4.
11-1 TEST OPERATION

1. Open the gas side stop valve.
2. Open the liquid side stop valve.
3. Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours. (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling only)
4. Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button ( ).
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button 4 times ( ) (2 times for wireless remote controller) and
TEST
operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.

6. Push AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button ( ) to make sure the unit is in operation.
7. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button ( ) and operate normally.
TEST
8. Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
English 21
3PN06588-3H

PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to “11-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION” if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION run button once to put the unit
in inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is “00”. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than “00”, refer to “11-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION”.
NOTE
• If a malfunction is preventing operation, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below. 2
11-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION
With the power on, it is possible to monitor the type of malfunction by looking at the malfunction code
displayed in the remote controller.
If nothing is displayed in the remote controller, check the following items before attempting a diagnosis based
on the malfunction code, as they might be a cause.
• Disconnected or incorrect wiring (between power supply and the outdoor unit, between the outdoor and
indoor units, and between the indoor unit and the remote controller)
• Burnt out indoor or outdoor unit fuse
• “88 ” will be displayed for a few seconds on the remote controller immediately after the power is turned on.
This display indicates that the remote controller is being checked to see whether it is ok or not, and does
not indicate a malfunction.
Diagnose with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and “ ” and the malfunction code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referring to the table
on the malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit No. with
the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
When the operation stops due to trouble, the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diagnose
the fault contents with the table on the malfunction code list looking for the malfunction code which can be
found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1) Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button, “ ” is displayed and “ 0 ” flashes.
(2) Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps .............. Perform all the following operations
1 short beep ................ Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep ................. No trouble
(3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the malfunction code flashes.
(4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper code.
(5) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the malfunction code flashes.
(6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
• A long beep indicate the malfunction code.
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,
“ ” starts flashing.
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble his-
tory disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code “00”(normal).
22 English
C: 3PN06588-3H

11-3 Malfunction code

• For places where the malfunction code is left blank, the “ ” indication is not displayed. Though the system
• Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
A5 Freeze-up protector “or stopped by high pressure control”
Air cleaner faulty
AH
Type set improper
AJ
C4 Sensor (R2T) for heat exchanger temperature is fault
C5 Sensor (R3T) for heat exchanger temperature is fault
C9 Sensor for suction air temperature is fault
CJ
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is possible.
E1 Outdoor unit’s PC board faulty
E3 High pressure abnormal(outdoor unit)
E5 Compressor motor lock malfunction
E6 Compressor motor lock by over current (outdoor)
E7
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction
E8 Input overcurrent (outdoor unit)
EA Cooling/heating switch malfunction (outdoor)
H4 Low pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
H6 Faulty position detection sensor (outdoor unit)
H7 Outdoor motor position signal malfunction
H8 CT abnormality (outdoor unit)
H9 Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J3 Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J6 Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J8 Liquid piping thermistor malfunction (heating) (outdoor)
J9 Gas piping thermistor malfunction (cooling) (outdoor)
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor)
L4
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor)
L5
Electric thermal (outdoor)
L8
Stall prevention (outdoor)
L9
English 23
C: 3PN06588-3H

LC Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units’ inverters (outdoor)

P1 Open-phase or main circuit low voltage (outdoor)
P3 PC-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
P4 Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
PJ
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC. 2
U0 Suction pipe temperature abnormal or refrigerant shortage
Reverse phase
U1
Reverse two of the L1,L2 and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction
U2
Includes the defect in 52C.
Incorrect wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
U4
If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly
UF
wired. Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring.
(The compressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation inde-
pendent of the remote controller operation.)
U5
Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controls.
U8
(Malfunction in sub remote control.)
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main
UA
unit’s PC board)
Incorrect combination with indoor unit and outdoor unit
24 English
C : 3PN06588-3H

2.3 FBQ71DV1 / FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1

g a j k l m
f e nd i
d
h
e
a Indoor unit
b Outdoor unit
Remote controller
c Depending on the system configuration, the remote
controller is not provided.
d Inlet air
e Discharge air
f Air outlet (Field supply)
g Exhaust duct (Field supply)
i Drain pipe
j Model name (model name plate)
k Air filter (Sold separately)
l Suction filter chamber (Sold separately)
m Suction duct (Field supply)
n Suction grille (Field supply)
Ground wire
p The line passes electricity from the inside unit to the
ground to prevent accidental electrical shock.
C : 3PN11586-1

2.3.2 Installation
FBQ71DV1
FBQ100DV1
SPLIT SYSTEM Air Conditioner Installation manual
FBQ125DV1
FBQ140DV1 2
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................................................................................1
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................3
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE.................................................................................6
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION ..................................................................7
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION ......................................................................................9
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK .....................................................................................9
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK ..................................................................................................12
8. DUCT WORK ................................................................................................................14
9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK ..........................................................................................15
10. WIRING EXAMPLE AND HOW TO SET THE REMOTE CONTROLLER.....................16
11. FIELD SETTING............................................................................................................20
12. TEST OPERATION .......................................................................................................23
13. WIRING DIAGRAM .....................................................................................................27
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read the these " SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS" carefully before installing air conditioning unit and be
sure to install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during the
start-up operation.
Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer how to
operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the customer to store
the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term “appliances not accessible to the general public”.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or
personal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
• Consult your local dealer regarding what to do in case of refrigerant leakage, when the air conditioner is to
be installed in a small room, it is necessary to take proper measures so that the amount of any leaked
refrigerant does not exceed the concentration limit in the event to leakage. Otherwise, this may lead to an
accident due to oxygen depletion.
C: 3PN11585-1

An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire.
wires so that the control box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead. Imperfect earthing may
result in electric shocks or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
• Do not directly touch refrigerant that has leaked from refrigerant pipes or other areas, as there is a danger
of frostbite.
• After completing installation, check for refrigerant gas leakage. Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant
gas leaks into the room and comes into contract with a source of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
• Do not allow children to climb on the outdoor unit and avoid placing objects on the unit.
Injury may result if the unit becomes loose and falls.
CAUTION
Install the receiver as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
• In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of the unit.
• Make sure to provide for adequate measure in order to prevent that the outdoor unit be used as a shelter
by small animals.
3PN11585-1

• Small animals making contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions, smoke or fire. Please instruct
the customer to keep the area around the unit clean
• Install in a machine room that is free of moisture. The unit is designed for indoor use.
• Disposal requirements Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, of the oil and of other parts must
be done in accordance with relevant local and national legislation. 2
1-2 SPECIAL NOTICE OF PRODUCT
• Refrigerant
• The refrigerant R410A requires that strict Precautions be observed for keeping the system clean, dry
and tightly sealed
A. Clean and Dry
Strict measure must be taken to keep impurities (including SUNISO oil and other mineral oils as well
as moisture) out of the system
B. Tightly
R410A will contribute only slightly to the greenhouse effect if released into the atmosphere.
Therefore, sealing tightness is particularly important in installation. Carefully read the chapter
“REFRIGERANT PIPING” and strictly observe the correct procedures.
• Since design pressure is 4.0MPa or 40 bar the thickness of pipes must be greater than previously.
Since R410A is a mixed refrigerant, the required additional refrigerant must be changed its liquid state.
(If the system is charged with refrigerant in its gaseous state, due to composition change, the system will
not function normally)
The indoor units are designed for R410A use. See the catalogue for indoor unit models that can be
connected (Normal operation is not possible when connecting units that are originally designed for other
refrigerants)
• Hold the hanging brackets in the case of moving the indoor and outdoor units at the time of and
after opening the packages. Do not impose undue force on other parts, such as the refrigerant
piping, drain piping, or flanges, in particular.
• Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect
refrigerant will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
• The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is
completed. Do not discard them!
• Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Where unpacking is
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid
damage or scratches to the unit.
• When moving the unit or after opening, hold the unit by the hanger brackets (× 4). Do not apply force to the
refrigerant piping, drain piping, flanges or plastic parts.
• For the installation of outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
• Do not install or operate the unit in rooms mentioned below.
• Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may
deteriorate which could eventually cause the unit to fall out of place, or could lead to leaks.)
• Where corrosive gas like sulfurous gas exists. (Copper tubing and brazed spots may corrode
which could eventually lead to refrigerant leaks.)
• Where exposed to combustible gases and where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline
is used. (Gas in the vicinity of the unit could ignite.)
• Where machines can generate electromagnetic waves. (Control system may malfunction.)
• Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage
fluctuates greatly such as that in factories.
Also in vehicles or vessels.
• This unit, both indoor and outdoor, is suitable for installation in a commercial and light industrial environment.
If installed as a household appliance it could cause electromagnetic interference.
C: 3PN11585-1

2-1 PRECAUTIONS
• Be sure to read this manual before installing the indoor unit.
• Entrust installation to the place of purchase or a qualified serviceman. Improper installation could lead to
leaks and, in worse cases, electric shock of fire.
• Use only parts provided with the unit or parts satisfying required specifications. Unspecified parts could
cause the unit to fall out of place, or could lead to leaks and, in worse cases, electric shock or fire.
• Be sure to mount an air filter (part to be procured in the field) in the suction air passage in order to prevent
water leaking, etc.
2-2 ACCESSORIES
Check that the following accessories are provided and that each accessory is correct in amount.
Refer to the Fig. 1 of this sheet.
[PRECAUTION]
The accessories are required for the installation of the air conditioner. Be sure to keep them until the
installation work is completed.
(1) - (13)
Operation manual
Installation manual
Fig. 1
Screws for duct

Name Metal clamp (1) Drain hose (2) Insulation for fitting
flanges (3)
As described in table
Quantity 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 each
below
Thin
M5×16
for liquid pipe (4)
Shape 71 type 18
100 • 125 •
26
140 type Thick
for gas pipe (5)
Washer fixing plate Wire sealing material

Name Sealing pad Clamp (8)
(9) (10)
Quantity – 9 pcs. 4 pcs. 2 pcs.
1 pc.
Shape Large (Dark gray) (6)
Small (Gray)
2 pcs.
Middle (Dark gray) (7)
3PN11585-1

Wire fixing bracket Wire fixing screw

Name Washer (11)
(12) (13)
Quantity 8 pcs. 2 pcs. 2 pcs. (Other)
• Operation manual 2
M4×8 • Installation manual
Shape
2-3 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

• These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller according to
customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 1
Remote controller
Wired type BRC1C61
Wireless type BRC4C64
NOTE
• If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in Table 1, select a suitable remote controller
after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER
INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
a. Items to be checked after completion of work
Items to be checked If not properly done, what is likely to occur. Check
Are the indoor and outdoor unit fixed firmly? The units may drop, vibrate or make noise.
Was the installation of the outdoor unit The unit may malfunction or the components
completed? burn out.
Is the gas leak test finished? No cooling or heating.
Is the unit fully insulated? (Refrigerant
Condensate water may drip.
piping, drain piping, and duct)
Dose drainage flow smoothly? Condensate water may drip.
Does the power supply voltage conform to The unit may malfunction or the components
the indication on the name plate? burn out.
The unit may malfunction or the components
burn out.
Is the air conditioner properly grounded? Dangerous in case of current leakage.
The unit may malfunction or the components
burn out.
Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet of
No cooling or heating.
either the indoor or outdoor units?
Did you set the external static pressure? No cooling or heating.
Did you check that no wiring connection
Electric shock or fire.
screws were loose?
Also review the “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”.
C: 3PN11585-1

b. Items to be checked at time of delivery

Are you sure the control box lid, air filter, air inlet grille, and air outlet grille are mounted?
Did you explain about operations while showing the operation manual to your customer?
Did you deliver the operation manual along with the installation manual to the customer?
Did you explain the customer the handling and cleaning methods of the field supplies
(e.g., the air filter, air inlet grilles, and air outlet grille)?
Did you deliver instruction manual, if any, for the field supplies to the customer?
c. Points for explanation about operations

The items with WARNING and CAUTION marks in the operation manual are the items pertaining to
possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask
your customers to read the operation manual.
2-4 NOTE TO INSTALLER

• Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating
different functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves
while looking at the manual.

Hold the hanging brackets in the case of moving the indoor and outdoor units at the time of and
after opening the packages. Do not impose undue force on other parts, such as the refrigerant
piping, drain piping, or flanges, in particular.
Add heat insulation material to the indoor unit if the temperature above the ceiling is likely to
exceed 30°C and a relative humidity of 80%.
Make sure that the insulation material is made of glass wool or polyethylene foam, has a minimum
thickness of 10 mm, and can be accommodated in the opening on the ceiling.
1)Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets with your customer’s
approval.
• A place where cool (warm) air is delivered to the entire room.
• Where nothing blocks the air passage.
• Where condensate can be properly drained.
• If supporting structural members are not strong enough to take the unit’s weight, the unit could fall out
of place and cause serious injury.
• Where the false ceiling is not noticeably on an incline.
• Where there is no risk of flammable gas leakage.
• Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured. (Refer to Fig. 2-1)
• Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit. (Refer to the
installation manual of the outdoor unit.)
CAUTION
• Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from
televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the noise.)
• In the case of the installation of a wireless remote controller, the transmission distance of the wireless
remote controller may be shortened if the room has a fluorescent light of electronic lighting type
(i.e., an inverter or rapid-start fluorescent light).
Keep the distance between the receiver and the fluorescent light as far as possible.
3PN11585-1

2)Use hanging bolts to install the indoor unit. Check that the place of installation withstands the weight of
the indoor unit. Secure the hanging bolts with proper beams if necessary.
Min. 20
(length: mm)
2
*H2=Min. 620
Min. 300 *H1=300
(If no ceiling board is provided.)

Min. 2500
Ceiling
Min. 450
Floor surface Min. 700 (service space)
* The H1 dimension indicates the height of the [Required installation place]

product. The dimensions indicate the
* Determine the H2 dimension by maintaining minimum required space of
a downward slope of at least 1/100 as installation.
specified in “7. DRAIN PIPING WORK”.
Fig. 2-1

1. Check the positional relationship between the ceiling opening hole and the hanging bolt of the unit.
• For the maintenance, inspection, and other servicing purposes of the control box and drain pump,
prepare one of the following service spaces.
1)Inspection hatch 1 (450 × 450) for the control box and a minimum space of 300 mm for the lower part
of the product. (Refer to Fig. 2-2)
2)Inspection hatch 1 (450 × 450) for the control box and inspection hatch 2 for the lower part of the
product (see axial direction view A-1). (Refer to Fig. 2-3)
3)Inspection hatch 3 for the lower part of the product and the lower part of the control box (see axial
direction view A-2). (Refer to Fig. 2-3)
Case 1 Control box 700
Inspection hatch 1
631
*H3=Min. 300
(Hanging bolt pitch) (450×450)
Control box
(Hanging bolt pitch)
Inspection hatch Ceiling Air outlet

Bottom of unit
C
B
Air inlet
Fig. 2-2 Hanging bolt (× 4)
3PN11585-1

Case 2, 3 Inspection hatch 1 Inspection hatch 3

(450×450) (Same as the indoor
Inspection hatch unit size +300 or more)
(Ceiling opening) Control box
Min. 200
Control box
*H3=Min. 20
Min. D=B+300
Control box
B
Inspection hatch Ceiling
A 700 700
Inspection hatch 2
(Same as the indoor
unit size or more)
* Determine the H3 dimension by
maintaining a downward slope Axial direction view A-1 Axial direction view A-2
of at least 1/100 as specified in Fig. 2-3
“7. DRAIN PIPING WORK”.
Model B C D
71 type 1000 1038 1300
100 • 125 • 140 type 1400 1438 1700 (length: mm)
2. Mount the canvas ducts to the air outlet and inlet so that the vibration of the air conditioner will not be
transmitted to the duct or ceiling. Apply a sound-absorbing material (insulation material) to the inner wall
of the duct and vibration insulation rubber to the hanging bolts (refer to 8. DUCT WORK).
3.Open installation holes (if the ceiling already exists).
• Open the installation holes on the ceiling. Lay the refrigerant piping, drain piping, power line,
transmission wiring, and remote controller wiring for the piping and wiring connection port of the unit.
In the case of the installation of a wireless remote controller, refer to the installation manual provided
with the wireless remote controller.
Refer to 6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK, 7. DRAIN PIPING WORK, and 10. WIRING EXAMPLE
AND HOW TO SET THE REMOTE CONTROLLER.
• The ceiling framework may need reinforcement in order to keep the ceiling horizontal and prevent the
vibration of the ceiling after the installation holes are opened. For details, consult your construction or
interior contractor.
4. Install the hanging bolts. Make sure that the hanging bolts are M10 in size.
• Use hole-in anchors if the hanging bolts
Installation example
already exist; otherwise use embedded
inserts and embedded foundation bolts so that Ceiling slab
they will withstand the weight of the unit.
Adjust the distance to the ceiling surface in Anchor
advance.
Long nut or turn-buckle
Hanging bolt
Indoor unit
NOTE All the above parts are field supplied.
3PN11585-1


It may be easier to install accessories (sold separately) before installing the indoor unit. Refer to the
installation manuals provided to the accessories as well.
Be sure to use the accessories and specified parts for installation work. 2
1) Temporally install the indoor unit.
• Connect the hanging brackets to the hanging bolts. Be sure to use and tighten the nut and washer (11) for
each hanging bracket from both upper and lower sides of the hanging bracket. (Refer to Fig. 3) At that time,
the fall of the washer (11) for the hanging bracket can be prevented if the washing fixing plate (9) is used.
[Fixing hanging brackets] [Fixing method of washers]
Part to be procured in the field Nut on the upper side
Washer (11) (accessory)

Insert
Tighten from above and below

(Double nut) Washer fixing plate (9)
(accessory)
Fig. 3
CAUTION
• During the installation work, perform the curing of the air outlet and protect the resin drain pan of
the indoor unit from the intrusion of foreign substances, such as welding spatters.
Otherwise, water leakage may occur as a result of damage, such as hole damage, to the resin drain pan.
2) Make adjustments so that the unit will be in the right position.

3) Check the level of the unit.
4) Remove the washer fixing plates for
the falling prevention of the washers Hanging bracket
for the hanging brackets, tighten the
nuts on the upper side, and securely
fix the unit.
Bottom of product
Level
Vinyl tube
CAUTION
• Use the level and check that the unit is installed horizontally. (4-directions)
• In the case of using a vinyl tube in place of the level, put the both edges of the vinyl tube in close contact
with the bottom of the product to make levelness adjustment.
If the unit is installed at a slant with the drain pipe side set high, in particular, the float switch will not operate
normally and water leakage may result.

As for the refrigerant piping of the outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual provided to the
outdoor unit.
Perform heat insulation work on both gas piping and liquid piping, or otherwise water leakage may
result.
Use the insulation material that withstands a temperature of 120°C.
3PN11585-1

Reinforce the insulation material for the refrigerant piping if the ambient temperature is high, or
otherwise dew condensation may result on the surface of the insulation material.
Make sure that the refrigerant is R410A before refrigerant piping work. If the refrigerant is different,
the air conditioner will not operate normally.
CAUTION
This product uses new refrigerant (R410A) only. Be sure to keep the items on the right-hand side and
conduct the installation work.
• Use a dedicated pipe cutter and flare tool for R410A.
• When connecting the flare, apply ether oil or ester oil to the flare.
• Be sure to use the flare nut provided with the unit. (Do not use a different flare nut (such as a
type-1 flare nut), or otherwise refrigerant leakage may result.)
• Perform the curing of the piping with pinching or taping of the piping in order to prevent the
intrusion of dirt, dust, and moisture into the piping.
CAUTION
• Be sure to use the specified type of refrigerant for the refrigeration cycle and do not contaminate
the refrigerant with air.
• Ventilate the room in case of refrigerant leakage during installation work.
1) Connect the piping. Torque wrench

• The outdoor unit is filled with refrigerant.
• When connecting or disconnecting piping to or
from the unit, be sure to use two spanners and
two torque wrenches. (Refer to Fig. 4)
• Refer to Table 2 for the processing dimensions of Spanner
the flare.
Flare nut
• Use the flare nut provided with the unit.
Piping union Fig. 4
• Apply ether oil or ester oil to both inner and
Ester oil or ether oil.
outer sides of the flare and screw in the flare
nut three to four turns first by hand at the time of
connecting the flare nut. (Refer to Fig. 5)
• Refer to Table 2 for the corresponding tightening
torque. Fig. 5
Table 2
Pipe size (mm) Tightening torque Flare dimensions A (mm) Flare shape
φ 6.4 14.2 – 17.2N·m 8.7 – 9.1
˚
45˚±2
R0.4-0.8
φ 9.5 32.7 – 39.9N·m 12.8 – 13.2
90˚±2˚
φ 12.7 49.5 – 60.3N·m 16.2 – 16.6
φ 15.9 61.8 – 75.4N·m 19.3 – 19.7
CAUTION
• Do not excessively tighten the flare nut.
Doing so will break the flare nut and refrigerant leakage may result.
• Make sure that all parts around the flare are free of oil.
The drain pan and the resin part may be deteriorated if oil is attached.
• If no torque wrenches are available, refer to Table 3 as a standard.

When the flare nut is tightened with the spanner, the tightening torque should increase suddenly.
Tighten the flare nut further for the corresponding angle shown in Table 3.
10
3PN11585-1

Table 3
Pipe size (mm) Further tightening angle Recommended arm length of tool
φ 6.4
φ 9.5
60 to 90 degrees
60 to 90 degrees
Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
2
φ 12.7 30 to 60 degrees Approx. 250mm
φ 15.9 30 to 60 degrees Approx. 300mm
2) On completion of installation work, check that there is no gas leakage.
3) Refer to the illustration on the right-hand side and be sure to perform heat insulation work on the piping
joints after gas leakage checks. (Refer to Fig. 6)
Heat insulation procedure for liquid piping
Insulation for fitting (4) (accessory)
Flare nut joint
Insulation material for piping
(on unit side) Make sure that the seam faces upward.
Attached to the surface. Middle sealing pad (7) (accessory)

Main unit

Wrap the insulation material around the
portion from the surface of the main unit
Insulation material for piping (field supply) to the upper part of the flare nut joint.
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe
Fig. 6
Heat insulation procedure for gas piping
Insulation for fitting (5) (accessory)
Flare nut joint
Insulation material for piping
(on unit side) Make sure that the seam faces upward.
Attached to the surface. Middle sealing pad (7) (accessory)

Wrap the insulation material around the
portion from the surface of the main unit
Insulation material for piping (field supply) to the upper part of the flare nut joint.
• Use the insulation for fitting (4) and (5) provided to the liquid piping and gas piping, respectively, and
conduct heat insulation work.
(Tighten both edges of the insulation for fitting (4) and (5) for each joint with the clamp (8).)
11
3PN11585-1

• Make sure that the joint of the insulation for fitting (4) and (5) for the joint on the liquid piping and gas
piping side faces upward.
• Wrap the middle sealing material (7) around the insulation for fitting (4) and (5) for the joint (flare nut part).
CAUTION
• Be sure to perform the heat insulation of the local piping up to the piping joint.
If the piping is exposed, dew condensation may result. Furthermore, a burn may be caused if a human body
comes in contact with the piping.
• Perform nitrogen substituent or apply nitrogen into the refrigerant piping (see NOTE 1) in the case
of refrigerant piping blazing (see NOTE 2). Then perform the flare connection of the indoor unit.
(Refer to Fig. 7)
Refrigerant Pressure reducing valve

piping Part to be Taping
brazed hands
valve
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 7
CAUTION
• Do not use any antioxidant at the time of piping blazing.
The piping may be clogged with a residual antioxidant and parts may malfunction.
NOTE
1. At the time of blazing, set the pressure of nitrogen to approximately 0.02 MPa (close to the pressure of
a breeze coming in contact with the cheek) with a decompression valve.
2. Do not use flux at the time of blazing and connecting the refrigerant piping. Use a copper phosphorus
brazing alloy (BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/BCu 93P-710/795: ISO3677), which does not require flux, for blazing.
(Flux has a bad influence on the refrigerant piping. Chlorine-based flux will cause piping corrosion.
Furthermore, if it contains fluorine, the flux will deteriorate refrigerant oil.)
• As for the branching of the refrigerant piping or refrigerant, refer to the installation manual provided with the
outdoor unit.

1) Remove the drain socket cover. (for transportation)
2) Conduct drain piping work.
Refrigerant
Check that the piping ensures proper draining. piping
• Make sure that the diameter of the piping excluding the rising
part is the same as or larger than the diameter of the
connecting pipe (vinyl chloride pipe with an outer diameter of Screw (4 portions)
32 mm and a nominal inner diameter of 25 mm).
• Make sure that the piping is short enough with a downward
Drain socket
slope of at least 1/100 and that there is no air bank formed. Drain socket cover
No drain trap is required. (for transportation)
CAUTION
• The drain piping will be clogged with water and water leakage may result if the water is accumulated in the
drain piping.
12
C: 3PN11585-1

• Conduct drain-up piping work if the gradient is insufficient.

• Attach a support bracket at 1 to 1.5 m intervals for the prevention of piping deflection.
1 - 1.5 m Support bracket
2
Downward slope of at least 1/100

• Be sure to use the drain hose (2) and metal clamp (1). Metal clamp (1)
Insert the drain hose (2) deep into the base of the drain
socket, and securely fasten the metal clamp (1) within the (accessory)
taped part on the insertion front end of the hose.
Be sure to fasten the screw of the metal clamp (1) until the
margin of the screw thread decreases to 4 mm or less. Tape Drain hose (2)
(accessory)
NOTE
Be sure to follow the instructions as below.
• Do not connect the drain piping directly to a sewer that smells of ammonia.
The ammonia in the sewer may reach through the drain piping and corrode the heat exchanger of the
indoor unit.
• Do not bend or twist the provided drain hose (2) in order not to impose excessive force on the hose.
(Doing so may result in water leakage.)
• Take the procedure shown in the following illustration to perform concentrated drain piping.
Min. 100 mm
Concentrated drain piping
Maintain a downward slope of at least

1/100 so that no air bank will be formed.
The drain piping will be clogged with
water and water leakage may result if the
water is accumulated in the drain piping.
• Select the diameter of the concentrated drain piping to suit the capacity of equipment connecting to the
concentrated drain piping (see the equipment design sheet).
Ceiling slab
1 - 1.5 m Support bracket
Metal clamp (1) (accessory)

Drain hose (2) (accessory)
3) Check the smooth draining of the piping on completion of the installation of the piping.
• Provide approximately one liter of water gradually into the drain pan through the water inlet on the
bottom of the drain socket or the outlet.
13
3PN11585-1

4) Be sure to conduct heat insulation work on the following portions, or otherwise water leakage may
occur as a result of dew condensation.
• Drain piping indoors
Water inlet
• Drain socket
Drain pan Refrigerant piping
Air outlet
Water inlet lid
Screw
Drain socket Plastic water

container
• On completion of the drainage check, refer to the following illustration, and use the provided large
sealing pad (6) and heat insulate the metal clamp (1) and drain hose (2).
Make sure that the
seam faces upward. Large sealing pad (6)
(accessory)
Metal clamp (1)

(accessory)
4 mm max.
8. DUCT WORK
Pay the utmost attention to the following items and conduct the duct work.
• Check that the duct will not be in excess of the setting range of external static pressure for the unit.
(Refer to the technical datasheet for the setting range.)
• Attach a canvas duct each to the air outlet and air inlet so that the vibration of the equipment will not be
transmitted to the duct or ceiling.
Use a sound-absorbing material (insulation material) for the lining of the duct and apply vibration insulation
rubber to the hanging bolts.
• At the time of duct welding, perform the curing of the duct so that the sputter will not come in contact with
the drain pan for the filter.
• If the metal duct pass through a metal lath, wire lath, or metal plate of a wooden structure, separate the duct
and wall electrically.
• Be sure to heat insulate the duct for the prevention of dew condensation. (Material: Glass wool or styrene
foam; Thickness: 25 mm)
• Be sure to attach the field supply air filter to the air inlet of the unit or field supply inlet in the air passage on
the air suction side. (Be sure to select an air filter with a duct collection efficiency of 50 weight percent.)
• Explain the operation and washing methods of the locally procured components (i.e., the air filter, air inlet
grille, and air outlet grille) to the customer.
• Locate the air outlet grille on the indoor side for the prevention of drafts in a position where indirect contact
with people.
14
3PN11585-1

• The air conditioner incorporates a function to adjust the fan to rated speed automatically. (11. FIELD SETTING)
Therefore, do not use booster fans midway in the duct.
Connection method of ducts on air inlet and outlet sides.
• Connect the field supply duct in alignment with the inner side of the flange.
• Connect the flange and unit with the flange connection screw (3).
2
• Wrap aluminum tape around the flange and duct joint in order to prevent air leakage.
Flange on air inlet side Flange on air outlet side
(provided with the unit) (provided with the unit)
Screws for duct Insulation material
flanges (3) (field supply)
(accessory) Screws
Air inlet Unit Air outlet for duct
flanges (3)
Insulation material Canvas duct (accessory)
(field supply) (field supply)
CAUTION
Connect the flange and unit with the flange connection screw (3) regardless of whether the duct is
connected to the air inlet side.

• For electric wiring work, refer to also “Wiring diagram” attached to the control box lid.
• Install a wiring interrupter or ground-fault circuit interrupter for the power wiring.
• Make sure the earth resistance is no greater than 100 Ω.
• Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for the size of power supply wiring connected
to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
• Do not connect the ground wire to gas and water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
• Gas pipes : might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
• Water pipes : no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
• Telephone ground wires or lightning rods : might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
Field fuses 2
H05VV-U4G
Wiring the units – 2.5 –
( NOTE 1)
Power supply wiring
15A H05VV-U2 2.5 –
(for Fan)
Remote controller cord Vinyl cord with sheath or
(In case of installing the – 0.75 - 1.25 Max. 500m
cable (2 wire)( NOTE 2)
control panel separately)
NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection.
2. Insulated thickness : 1mm or more.
15
3PN11585-1

10. WIRING EXAMPLE AND HOW TO SET THE REMOTE CONTROLLER

10-1 CONNECTING WIRING THE UNITS, POWER SUPPLY, GROUND, AND REMOTE
CONTROLLER WIRING
(Remove the control box lid as shown below and connect each wire.)
1) Remove the control box lid.
Screw
(3 portions)
2) Lay the wires in the control box

through the wire inlet on the side of
the control box. Low-voltage wiring inlet
• Remote controller wiring
(Low voltage)
High-voltage wiring inlet

• Wiring the units (High voltage)
• Power supply wiring (High voltage)
• Ground wiring (High voltage)
CAUTION
• Do not lay the remote controller wiring along with the wiring the units, power supply wiring or other electric
wiring in the same route. Separate the remote controller wiring at least 50 mm from the wiring the units,
power supply wiring or other electric wiring, or otherwise malfunctions or failures may be caused by
external electric noise that may interfere with the remote controller wiring.
• For the installation and wiring of the remote controller, refer to the remote controller installation manual
provided with the remote controller.
• For wiring the units, power supply wiring, refer to the wiring diagram as well.
• Be sure to connect the remote controller wiring correctly to the right terminal block.
16
3PN11585-1

3) Follow the instructions below, and lay the wires in the control box.
Fix the wires with
clamp (8) to the wire
fixing bracket
provided to the
Insert the cord
into the wire clips
2
control box. provided with the
Remote controller
• Wiring the units control box.
wiring (Low voltage)
(High voltage)
• Power supply wiring
(High voltage) PROHIBITED
• Ground wiring Never connect wiring the units
(High voltage) and the power supply wiring.
P1 P2 F1 F2
Power supply terminals (X1M) Remote controller

wiring (No polarity)
Twist and fix the upper part so Connection method of remote
that the wires will not drop out. controller terminals (X2M)
Ground 1 2 3 L N
Fix the cord with the • If stranded wires are used,
Wiring Power supply do not solder the front end
the units wiring clamp (8) to the wire
fixing bracket provided of the wires.
Connection method of
power supply terminals to the control box.
WARNING
Trim and lay the wiring neatly and attach the control box lid securely.
An electric shock or fire may result if the control box lid catches any wiring or the wires push up the lid.
4) Put the control box lid, and wrap the wire sealing
material (Small) (10) around the wires so as to Wire through holes
block the wire through holes.
CAUTION
• After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation
(procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in,
they could cause short circuits in the control box.)
17
3PN11585-1

5) Mount the provided wire fixing bracket (12) with

the wire fixing screw (13). Fix each wire with the Remote controller
provided clamp (8). wiring
Wiring the units
Power supply wiring
Ground wiring
Fixing use Clamp (8) (accessory)
Wire fixing bracket (12) (accessory)

Wire fixing screw (13) (accessory)
[Precautions for Wiring the Units and power

supply wiring]
Attach insulation sleeve
• Connect round crimp-style terminals provided with
insulation sleeves to the terminal block for power
supply.
Be sure to follow the instructions provided below if Round crimp-style terminal Electric wire
the specified terminals cannot be used.
Otherwise, abnormal heat may be generated as
a result of the loosening of the wires.
Connect the wires Do not connect a Do not connect
evenly. wire to the single wires different
side only. from each other in
diameter.
• If stranded wires are used, do not solder the front end of the wires.
• Connect proper wires securely and fix the wires so that external force will not be imposed on the terminals.
• Use an appropriate screwdriver to tighten the terminal screws. The screw heads may be damaged if the
screwdriver is too small and the terminal screws will not be tightened properly.
• Do not tighten the terminal screws excessively, or otherwise the screw heads may be damaged.
• Refer to the table below for the required tightening torque values of the terminal screws.
Tightening torque (N·m)
Terminal block for remote controller and transmission wires 0.80 - 0.96
Terminal block for power supply, and wiring the units 1.18 - 1.44
10-2 WIRING EXAMPLE
WARNING
Install an earth leakage breaker.
The installation of an earth leakage breaker is imperative for the prevention of electric shocks and fire
accidents.
18
3PN11585-1

(For the wiring of outdoor units, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.)
• Pair type: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system)
• 2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit.
• Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to the 2
remote controller)
Pair type 2 remote controllers control
Main power supply Main power supply
Main switch Main switch
Fuse Fuse
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

1 2 3 1 2 3
Indoor unit (NOTE 2)

P1 P1 P1 P1
P2 P2 P2 P2
Remote controller Remote controller

(Optional accessory) P1
P2
1
1
2
3
2
Remote controller
Power supply L L Power supply L
3
L (Slave)
N N
N N
(Optional accessories)
220-240V Indoor unit 220-240V Indoor unit
50Hz 50Hz
Group control
Main power supply Main power supply Main power supply

Main switch Main switch Main switch
Fuse Fuse Fuse
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Remote Remote
controller controller
P1 P2 P1 P2 (Optional P1 P2 P1 P2 (Optional P1 P2 P1 P2
accessory) accessory) Remote
Power supply Power supply Power supply controller
1 1 1
(Optional
2 2 2 accessory)
220-240V 3 220-240V 3 220-240V 3
L L L L L L
50Hz N N 50Hz N N 50Hz N N
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires must match the terminal symbol.
2. If the unit is under 2 remote controller control, perform additional wiring of the remote controller to the
remote controller terminal board.
3. If the unit is under group control, detach the remote controller cord connecting the remote controller
terminal board and the remote controller.
19
3PN11585-1

10-3 CONTROL BY 2 REMOTE CONTROLLERS (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote

controllers)
• Set one of the remote controllers to main and the other to sub in the case of remote control with two remote
controllers.
Switching Main/Sub
1) Insert a screwdriver into the clearance between the grooves of the lower casing and the upper casing
to remove the upper casing. (2 grooves) (The remote controller PCB is attached to the upper casing.)
2) Set the main/sub switch on one of the remote controller PCBs to sub. (Keep the switch of the other remote
controller PCB set to main.)
Upper part of
S
remote controller (Factory setting)
M
Remote controller
PC board
Only one remote
S
Lower part of controller needs to be
M
remote controller changed if factory
settings have
Insert the screwdriver here and gently work remained untouched.
off the upper part of remote controller.
11. FIELD SETTING

NOTE
• Before 12. TEST OPERATION, be sure to make the following field settings as explained in 11. FIELD
SETTING.
Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
Field setting must be made from the remote controller in accordance with the installation condition.
• Setting can be made by changing the “MODE NO.”, “FIRST CODE NO.”, and “SECOND CODE NO.”.
• For setting and operation, refer to the “FIELD SETTING” in the installation manual of the remote controller.
SECOND
CODE NO.
MODE NO.
FIRST
CODE NO.
SETTING FIELD SET
MODE
• Set the remote controller to the “FIELD SET MODE”. For details, refer to the “HOW TO SET IN THE
FIELD”, in the remote controller manual.
20
3PN11585-1

With Wireless Remote Controller Used

Set the wireless remote controller address before using the wireless remote controller.
For the setting method of the address, refer to the operation manual provided with the wireless remote
controller.
2
NOTE
• A “MODE NO.” is set on a group basis. To make a mode setting on a room unit basis or check the setting
made, however, set the corresponding mode number in the parentheses.
1. Settings for Optional Accessories
• In the case of connecting optional accessories, refer to the operation manuals provided with the optional
accessories and make necessary settings.
2. External Static Pressure Settings
Make settings in either method (a) or method (b) as explained below.
(a) Use the airflow auto adjustment function to make settings.
Airflow auto adjustment: The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated quantity.
NOTE
Be sure to check that the external static pressure is within the rated range before making the settings.
If the external static pressure is beyond the rated range, no automatic adjustments will be made and an
airflow rate insufficiency or water leakage may result. (Refer to the relevant technical datasheet for the
rated range of the external static pressure.)
1) Check that power supply wiring and wiring the units to the air conditioner is completed along with
duct installation. If a closing damper is installed in the air-conditioning system, make sure that the
closing damper is opened. Furthermore, check that the air filter as a field supply is attached to the
air passage on the suction side.
2) If there are a number of air outlets and inlets, adjust the throttles so that the airflow rate of each air
outlet and inlet will coincide with the designed airflow rate. At that time, operate the air conditioner
in “fan operation mode”. To change the airflow rate, press and set the airflow adjustment button of
the remote controller to H, or L.
3) Make settings for airflow automatic adjustment. After setting the air conditioner to “fan operation
mode”, stop the air conditioner, go to “FIELD SET MODE”, select “MODE NO. 21” (11 in the case
of group settings), set the setting “FIRST CODE NO.” to 7, and set the setting “SECOND CODE
NO.” to 03.
Return to normal mode after these settings, and press the ON/OFF OPERATION button. Then the
operation lamp will be lit and the air conditioner will go into fan operation for airflow automatic
adjustment. Do not adjust the throttles of the air outlets or inlets during automatic adjustment of the
air conditioner. After the air conditioner runs approximately one to eight minutes, the air conditioner
will finish airflow adjustment automatically, the operation lamp will be turned OFF, and the air
conditioner will come to a stop.
Table 4
MODE NO. FIRST CODE NO. Setting contents
11 (21) 7 Airflow adjustment
SECOND CODE NO.
01 02 03
OFF Completion of airflow adjustment Start of airflow adjustment
4) After the air conditioner stops operating, check with “MODE NO. 21” on an indoor unit basis that 02
is set for the “SECOND CODE NO.” in Table 4. If the air conditioner does not stop operating
automatically or the “SECOND CODE NO.” is not 02, repeat steps from 3). If error is displayed,
check the defective point.
21
3PN11585-1

CAUTION
• If there is any change after airflow adjustment in the ventilation paths (e.g., the duct and air outlet), be sure
to make airflow auto adjustment again.
• Consult your Daikin representative if there is any change in the ventilation paths (e.g., the duct and air
outlet) after the test operation is finished or the air conditioner is moved to another place.
(b) Select External Static Pressure with Remote Controller

Check that 01 (OFF) is set for the “SECOND CODE NO.” in “MODE NO. 21” for airflow adjustment on
an indoor unit basis in Table 4. The “SECOND CODE NO.” is set to 01 (OFF) at factory set. Change
the “SECOND CODE NO.” as shown in Table 5 according to the external static pressure of the duct to
be connected.
1) The “SECOND CODE NO.” is set to 01 (an external static pressure of 50 Pa) at factory set.
Table 5
External Static Pressure MODE NO. FIRST CODE NO. SECOND CODE NO.
50Pa 01
60Pa 02
70Pa 03
80Pa 04
90Pa 05
100Pa 06
110Pa 07
13 (23) 06
120Pa 08
130Pa 09
140Pa 10
150Pa 11
160Pa 12
180Pa 13
200Pa 14
CAUTION
Keep in mind that a shortage of airflow quantity or water leakage will result because the air conditioner will
be operated outside the rated range of airflow quantity if the external static pressure is wrongly set.
3. Filter Sign Settings

• The remote controller is provided with an LCD that tells the time of air filter cleaning.
• If the air conditioner is used in places with excessive dust, change the “SECOND CODE NO.” as shown
in Table 6. The “SECOND CODE NO.” is set to 01 (standard) at factory set.
Table 6
SECOND CODE
Dirt Time for display MODE NO. FIRST CODE NO.
NO.
Approximately
Standard 01
2500 hours
0
Approximately 10 (20)
Excessive dust
1250 hours 02
No display (*) 3
* Select “No display” under conditions in which the cleaning display is not required, such as the time of regular
maintenance.
22
3PN11585-1

12. TEST OPERATION

Refer to the section of “FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING
CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED” .
2
1. HOW TO TEST OPERATION
1) Open the gas side stop valve.
2) Open the liquid side stop valve.
3) Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling
only).
4) Set to cooling operation with control panel and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button ( ).
5) Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button ( ) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller)
TEST
and operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.

6) Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button ( ) and operate normally.
TEST
7) Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
PRECAUTIONS
• Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
• After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is “00” (=normal).
If the code reads anything other than “00”, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
2. HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR PROBLEMS

With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller.
• If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner.
a malfunction shown in the table below may happened.
Remote controller display Malfunction
• Power supply trouble or Open phase connection
No display
• Wrong remote controller connection wiring
• Remote controller faulty
• Fuse faulty
88*
88 flashing • Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
*After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display “88”. This is not a
problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the remote controller. ( NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and “ ” and the error code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display . In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referring to
the table on the Error code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor
unit no with the trouble can be recognized.( NOTE 2)
When the operation stops due to trouble, the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case,
diagnose the fault contents with the table on the Error code list looking for the error code which
can be found by following procedures.( NOTE 2)
23
C: 3PN11585-1

1) Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button, “ ” is displayed and “ 0 ” flashes.

2) Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps...............Perform all the following operations
1 short beep ................Perform 3) and 6)
1 long beep..................No trouble
3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the error code flashes.
4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the
upper code.
5) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the error code flashes.
6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower
code.
• A long beep indicate the error code.
NOTE
1. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller, “ ” starts flashing and
changes the inspection mode.
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble
history disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code “00”(normal).
3. Malfunction code
• For places where the error code is left blank, the “ ” indication is not displayed. Though the system
• Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
A7 Swing flap motor locked
A8 Indoor unit power supply voltage abnormal
Air cleaner faulty
AH
Type set improper
AJ
C1
Indoor unit fan driver PCB ↔ Indoor control PCB transmission abnormal
Power source malfunction (indoor unit)
C4 Sensor for heat exchanger lamp is fault
C6 Indoor unit fan driver PCB combination failure, control PCB type-wise setting failure
C9 Sensor for suction air lamp is fault
CC Temperature sensor system faulty
CJ
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is possible.
E1 Outdoor unit’s PC board faulty (outdoor unit)
E3 High pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
E5 Compressor motor lock malfunction (outdoor unit)
E7
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction (outdoor unit)
24
3PN11585-1


H7 Outdoor motor position signal malfunction (outdoor unit)
H9
Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit) 2
The air conditioner comes to a stop due to an error depending on the model or operating
conditions.
J1 Pressure sensor system error (batch) (outdoor unit)
J2 Current sensor faulty
Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J3 The air conditioner comes to a stop due to an error depending on the model or operating
conditions.
J6 The air conditioner comes to a stop due to an error depending on the model or operating
conditions.
J7
J8 Liquid piping temperature sensor system error (outdoor unit)
J9 Suction temperature sensor faulty (outdoor unit)
JA Pressure sensor for discharge pipe faulty (outdoor unit)
JC Pressure sensor for suction pipe faulty (outdoor unit)
L1 Inverter system error (outdoor unit)
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor unit)
L4
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor unit)
L5
Electric thermal (outdoor unit)
L8
Stall prevention (outdoor unit)
L9
LC Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units’ inverters (outdoor unit)
P1 Open-phase (outdoor unit)
P3 PC board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
P4 Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
PJ
Suction pipe temperature abnormal
U0
The quantity of refrigerant may be insufficient.
Reverse phase
U1
Reverse two of the L1, L2 and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction (outdoor unit)
U2
Inverter phase loss or a failure in the main circuit capacitor may be resulting.
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board mounted
U4 on the indoor and the outdoor units.
UF If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly wired. Therefore,
immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring. (The compressor and the fan
mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of the remote controller operation.)
25
C: 3PN11585-1

Transmission error (indoor unit – remote controller)

U5
Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controllers.
U8
(Malfunction in sub remote controller.)
UA
Error in multi-system settings for simultaneous ON/OFF operation.
UJ Transmission failure in accessory equipment
CAUTION
If interior finish work is continuing on completion of the test operation of the air conditioner, explain the cus-
tomer not to operate the air conditioner until the interior finish work is completed for the protection of the
air conditioner.
Otherwise, substances that will be generated from interior finish work materials, such as paint and
adhesive agents, may contaminate the air conditioner.
26
3PN11585-1

EDHK281006 Installation of Outdoor Unit
3. Installation of Outdoor Unit

3.1 RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 / RR100MY1 / RR125MY1
3.1.1 Installation
1PN11661A

Installation of Outdoor Unit EDHK281006
1PN11661A

1PN11661A

1PN11661A

1PN11661A

1PN11661A

1PN11661A

1PN11661A

1PN11662A

1PN11662A

1PN11662A

1PN11662A

1PN11662A

1PN11662A

1PN11662A

1PN11662A

3.2 RR140MY1
3.2.1 Installation
1PN11663A

1PN11663A

1PN11663A

1PN11663A

1PN11663A

1PN11663A

1PN11663A

1PN11663A

1PN11664A

1PN11664A

1PN11664A

1PN11664A

1PN11664A

1PN11664A

1PN11664A

1PN11664A

EDHK281006
Part 3
Detail Information
of Options
3
1. Accessories.........................................................................................173
1.1 Indoor Unit............................................................................................173
1.2 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................175
2. Remote Controller ...............................................................................176
2.1 BRC1C61 — Wired Remote Controller ................................................176
2.2 BRC1D61 — Wired Remote Controller with
Weekly Schedule Timer .......................................................................180
2.3 BRC1E61 — Navigation Remote Controller (Wired Type)...................186
2.4 Wireless Remote Controller .................................................................200
3. FCQ.....................................................................................................202
3.1 BYCP125K-W1 — Decoration Panel ...................................................202
3.2 KDBH55K160F — Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet................207
3.3 KDBP55H160FA — Panel Spacer .......................................................211
3.4 KDDP55K160(K) — Fresh Air Intake Kit (Chamber Type)...................214
3.5 KDDP55X160 — Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type)...........219
— High Efficiency Filter (Including Chamber) ......................................222
— Replacement High Efficiency Filter..................................................225
3.8 KDDFP55H160 — High Efficiency Filter Chamber ..............................226
3.9 KAFP551K160 — Replacement Long-life Filter ...................................229
3.10 KAFP55H160 — Ultra Long-life Filter Unit (Including Chamber) .........230
3.11 KAFP55H160H — Replacement Ultra Long-life Filter..........................233
3.12 KKSJ55K160 — Chamber Connection Kit ...........................................234
3.13 KDJP55H80 / KDJP55H160 — Branch Duct Chamber........................235
3.14 KDTP55K80 / KDTP55K160 — Insulation Kit for High Humidity..........238
3.15 KRP1H98 — Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ....................................240
4. FHQ.....................................................................................................249
4.1 KDU50N125VE — Drain-up Kit............................................................249
— Replacement Long-life Filter............................................................254
4.3 KHFP5MA160 — L-type Piping Kit (for Upward Direction) ..................255
4.4 KRP1CA93 — Installation Box for Adaptor PCB..................................256
4.6 DTA112BA51 — Interface Adaptor for SkyAir Series ..........................262
4.7 KJB212AA / KJB311AA — Electrical Box with Earth Terminal ............264
5. FBQ.....................................................................................................266
— Service Access Panel ......................................................................266
Detail Information of Options 171

EDHK281006
5.2 KDAJ25K71A / KDAJ25K140A — Air Discharge Adaptor....................269

— High Efficiency Filter ........................................................................271
5.4 KDDF37AA80 / KDDF37AA160 — High Efficiency Filter Chamber .....272
5.5 KAF371AA80 / KAF371AA160 — Long Life Filter ...............................275
5.6 KAF375AA80 / KAF375AA160 — Long Life Filter Chamber Kit ..........276
5.7 KRP4A96 — Mounting Plate for Adaptor PCB.....................................279
6. Outdoor Unit........................................................................................286
6.1 KKPJ5F180 — Central Drain Plug .......................................................286
172 Detail Information of Options

EDHK281006 Accessories
1. Accessories
1.1 Indoor Unit
1.1.1 FCQ
Optional
accessories Kit name
Name of option Remark FCQ100 FCQ125 FCQ140
FCQ71KVEA
KVEA KVEA KVEA
Decoration panel BYCP125K-W1
Sealing member of air discharge outlet KDBH55K160F
Panel spacer
Without T-joint
KDBP55H160FA
3
pipe and fan KDDP55K160
Chamber type
Fresh air intake kit With T-joint pipe,
KDDP55K160K
without fan
Direct installation type KDDP55X160
Chamber connection kit *2 KKSJ55K160
Insulation kit for high humidity KDTP55K80 KDTP55K160
(Colorimetric method 65%) KAFP556H80 KAFP556H160
High-efficiency filter
(Colorimetric method 90%) KAFP557H80 KAFP557H160
Replacement high-efficiency (Colorimetric method 65%) KAFP552H80 KAFP552H160
Filter (Colorimetric method 90%) KAFP553H80 KAFP553H160
High-efficiency filter chamber KDDFP55H160
Replacement long-life filter KAFP551K160
Ultra long-life filter KAFP55H160
Replacement ultra long-life filter KAFP55H160H
Branch duct chamber KDJP55H80 KDJP55H160
Wired type *1 BRC1C61
Remote controller
Wireless type BRC7F632F
Wired remote controller with weekly schedule timer *1 BRC1D61
Navigation remote controller Wired type *1 BRC1E61
Central remote controller *3 DCS302CA61
Unified ON/OFF controller *3 DCS301BA61
Schedule timer *3 DST301BA61
Intelligent Touch Controller *3 DCS601C51
Adaptor for wiring *4 KRP1C63
Group control adaptor *4 KRP4AA53
Installation box for adaptor PCB KRP1H98
Remote sensor (for indoor temperature) KRCS01-4B
C : 3D058465A
Notes: *1. Wiring for wired remote controller to be procured locally.

*2. Required for installing high-efficiency filter of ultra long-life filter.
*3. The indoor unit is equipped standardly with the Interface for SkyAir series and an option is unnecessary.
*4. Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1H98) is necessary.

Accessories EDHK281006
1.1.2 FHQ
Optional
Name of option Remark
FHQ71BVV1B FHQ100BVV1B FHQ125BVV1B
Long-life filter Resin net KAF501DA80 KAF501DA112 KAF501DA160
Drain-up kit KDU50N125VE
L-type piping kit (for upward direction) KHFP5MA160
Remote controller
Wireless type BRC7E66
intelligent Touch Controller *2 DCS601C51
Adaptor for wiring KRP1BA54
Group control adaptor *3 KRP4AA52
Interface adaptor for SkyAir series DTA112BA51
Installation box for adaptor PCB KRP1CA93
Electrical box with earth terminal (3 blocks) KJB311AA
Electrical box with earth terminal (2 blocks) KJB212AA
C : 3D044485B
Notes: *1. Wiring for wired remote controller to be procured locally.
*2. This optional accessory requires DTA112BA51.
*3. Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1CA93) is necessary.

EDHK281006 Accessories
1.1.3 FBQ-D
Optional
Name of option Remark
FBQ71DV1 FBQ100DV1 FBQ125DV1 FBQ140DV1
65% KAF372AA80 KAF372AA160
High efficiency filter
90% KAF373AA80 KAF373AA160
Filter chamber KDDF37AA80 KDDF37AA160
Long life replacement filter KAF371AA80 KAF371AA160
Long life filter chamber kit KAF375AA80 KAF375AA160
KTBJ25K80W KTBJ25K160W
Service access panel KTBJ25K80F KTBJ25K160F 3
KTBJ25K80T KTBJ25K160T
Air discharge adaptor KDAJ25K71A KDAJ25K140A
Remote controller
Wireless type BRC4C64
Adaptor for wiring *KRP1C64
Wiring adaptor for electrical appendices (2) *KRP4AA51
Mounting plate for adaptor PCB ** KRP4A96 *5 *6
Intelligent Touch Controller *3 DCS601C51
3D066072
C: 3D066074
Notes: *1. If installing a high efficiency filter on the unit, an assembly chamber for either bottom or rear suction is
required.
*2. Wiring for wired remote controller to be procured locally.
*3. The indoor unit is equipped standardly with the Interface for SkyAir series and an option is unnecessary.
*4. Mounting plate ** is necessary for each adaptor marked*.
*5. Up to 2 adaptors can be fixed for each mounting plate.
*6. Only one mounting plate can be installed for each indoor unit.
1.2 Outdoor Unit

1.2.1 RR
Optional
Name of option
RR71MV1 RR71MY1 RR100MY1 RR125MY1 RR140MY1
Central drain plug KKPJ5F180
4D066663

Remote Controller EDHK281006
2. Remote Controller
2.1 BRC1C61 — Wired Remote Controller
Names and functions of parts

5 12 4 2 1
3
7 hr
9
C L H
hr NOT 11
6 TEST AVAILABLE
10
8 13
14 21
20
TEST
19
16 15 17 18 22
ON/OFF BUTTON DISPLAY “ ” (DEFROST)

12
1 Press the button and the system will start.
Press the button again and the system will stop.
NON-FUNCTIONING DISPLAY
OPERATION LAMP (RED)
2 If that particular function is not available, pressing
The lamp lights up during operation. the button may display the words “NOT
DISPLAY “ ” (UNDER CENTRALIZED AVAILABLE” for a few seconds.
CONTROL) When running multiple units simultaneously the
13 “NOT AVAILABLE” message will only be appear
3 When this display shows, the system is UNDER
CENTRALIZED CONTROL. if none of the indoor units is equipped with the
function. If even one unit is equipped with the
DISPLAY “ ” “ ”“ ”“ ”
function, the display will not appear.
(VENTILATION/AIR CLEANING)
TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON
4 This display shows that the total heat exchange 14
and the air cleaning unit are in operation
(These are optional accessories). TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON
15
DISPLAY “ ” “ ” “ ” “ ” “ ”
(OPERATION MODE) INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
5 This display shows the current OPERATION 16 This button is used only by qualified service
MODE. For cooling only type, “ ” (Auto) persons for maintenance purposes.
and “ ” (Heating) are not installed. PROGRAMMING TIME BUTTON
DISPLAY “ TEST” (INSPECTION/TEST 17 Use this button for programming “START and/or
OPERATION) STOP” time.
6 When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
BUTTON is pressed, the display shows the 18
system mode is in. Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
hr FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
DISPLAY “ ” (PROGRAMMED TIME) 19
hr
7 FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON

This display shows the PROGRAMMED TIME
of the system start or stop. 20 Press this button to select the fan speed,
DISPLAY “ C ” (SET TEMPERATURE) HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
8 OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
This display shows the set temperature. 21
DISPLAY “ ” (FAN SPEED) Press this button to select OPERATION MODE.
9 AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
This display shows the set fan speed. 22
DISPLAY “ ” (AIR FLOW FLAP)
10 NOTE
• For the sake of explanation, all indications are shown
DISPLAY “ ”(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER) on the display in the above figure contrary to actual
11 running situations.
3PA59583-16Z

EDHK281006 Remote Controller
Installation


Notes: 1. Setting is carried out in the group mode, however, set the mode number inside the ( ) for individual setting of
the each indoor unit or confirmation after setting.
2. The SECOND CODE number is set to “01” when shipped from the factory.
However for the following cases it is set to “02”.
• Air flow direction range setting.
3. Do not make any settings not given in the table above.
4. Not displayed if the indoor unit is not equipped with that function.
5. When returning to the normal mode, “88” may be displayed in the LCD in order for the remote controller to
initialize itself.
2P068938

2.2 BRC1D61 — Wired Remote Controller with Weekly Schedule Timer

3P107422-3D

3P107422-3D

2.2.2 Installation
3P107422-4D

3P107422-4D

3P107422-4D

3P107422-4D

186
2.3
2.3.1
Names and Functions
3P243520-1B
1. Operation mode selector button 7. Left button (Be sure to press
Ɣ Press this button to select the operation the part with the symbol )
1. Operation mode mode of your preference. (See page 14.) Ɣ Used to highlight the next items on the
selector button * Available modes vary with the connecting left-hand side.
Remote Controller
model. Ɣ Each screen is scrolled in the left-hand

11. LCD (with backlight) direction.
2. Fan speed control button Ɣ Home leave settings are enabled with this
button kept pressed for at least four
Ɣ Press this button to select the fan speed of
seconds. (See page 19.)
your preference. (See page 15.)
* Available fan speed vary with the
4. Up button connecting model. 8. On/Off button
Names and functions
5. Down button Ɣ Press this button and system will start.

3. Menu/Enter button Ɣ Press this button again and system will
6. Right button stop.
Ɣ Used to indicate the main menu.
7. Left button (See page 24 for the menu items.)
Ɣ Used to enter the setting item selected. 9. Operation lamp (Green)
9. Operation lamp Ɣ This lamp lights up during operation.
4. Up button (Be sure to press the Ɣ This lamp blinks if a error occurs.
8. On/Off button
part with the symbol )
3. Menu/Enter button Ɣ Used to raise the set temperature. 10.Cancel button
Ɣ The next items on the upper side will be Ɣ Used to return to the previous screen.
highlighted.
10. Cancel button (The highlighted items will be scrolled 11. LCD (with backlight)
continuously when the button is kept
pressed.) Ɣ The backlight will be light for approximately
Ɣ Used to change the item selected. 30 seconds by pressing any operation
button. Operate buttons excluding the On/
2. Fan speed control Off button while the backlight is lit.
5. Down button (Be sure to press Ɣ If two remote controllers are used to control
button the part with the symbol ) a single indoor unit, the backlight of the
Ɣ Used to lower the set temperature. remote controller operated earlier than the
Ɣ The next items on the lower side will be other one will be lit.
highlighted.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled
continuously when the button is kept
pressed.)
BRC1E61 — Navigation Remote Controller (Wired Type)
Functions other than basic operation items (i.e., On/Off, Operation Ɣ Used to change the item selected.
mode selector, Fan speed control, and temperature settings) are set
from the menu screen. 6. Right button (Be sure to press
the part with the symbol )
NOTE
Ɣ Used to highlight the next items on the
Ɣ Do not install the remote controller in places exposed to direct sunlight. right-hand side.
Otherwise, the LCD may become discolored and nothing may be displayed. Ɣ Each screen is scrolled in the right-hand
Ɣ Do not pull or twist the remote controller cord. direction.
Otherwise, the remote controller may error. Ɣ Home leave settings are enabled with this
Ɣ Do not press the buttons on the remote controller with objects with sharp ends. button kept pressed for at least four
Otherwise, the remote controller may receive damage or error. seconds. (See page 19.)
8 English English 9
EDHK281006
Detail Information of Options

01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 8 5/15/2009 10:21:01
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM 9 5/15/2009 10:21:01 AM
Names and Functions
3P243520-1B
1. Operation mode “Error: Press Menu Button.”
Liquid Crystal Display “Warning: Press Menu Button.”
EDHK281006
Ɣ Used to display the present operation

Ɣ Displayed if the error or warning is detected
Ɣ Two types of liquid crystal display (LCD) are available. The standard display is by mode Cool, Heat, Vent, Fan, Dry or Auto
(see page 53).
default set. mode.
Ɣ To go to the detailed display, select the detailed display in the main menu. (See page 46.) “Quick Cool/Heat” (SkyAir only)
Ɣ The displayed contents of the screen vary with the operation mode of the equipment 2. Automatic operation mode Ɣ Displayed if the quick cooling/heating
interlocked. (The following display will appear when the air conditioner is in automatic function is turned ON (see page 31).
Ɣ Used to display the present automatic
heating operation.) “Clean the filter.”

operation mode (Cool or Heat).
“Clean the element.”
Standard display “Clean the filter and element.”
11. Changeover under control 3. Fan speed Ɣ Displayed when the time to clean the filter
12.Home Leave
Ɣ Used to display the fan speed that is set for or element has come (see page 51).
10.Under centralized 9.( ) display
the air conditioner.
control Ɣ The fan speed will not be displayed if the
8.( ) display 7. Ventilation / Purifying
1.Operation mode Auto air conditioner does not have fan speed
Heat Set temperature control function. Ɣ Displayed when a total heat exchanger
2.Automatic 4.Set temperature unit, such as the Ventiair, is connected.
operation mode 20°C display Ɣ Ventilation mode icon.“ ”
4. Set temperature display
These icons indicate the current ventilation
3.Fan speed 5.Defrost/Hot start Ɣ Used to display the temperature set for the
This function not available mode (HRV only) (AUTOMATIC, HEAT
air conditioner. EXCHANGE, BYPASS).
7.Ventilation 6.Message
<Standard display example> Ɣ AIR Purifying ICON “ ”
5. Defrost/Hot start “ ” This icon indicates that the air cleaning unit
Detailed display
(See page 16.) (option) is operational.
The airflow direction, clock, and detailed selection items appear
If Ventilating operation “ ” is displayed:
on the detailed display screen in addition to the items appearing Ɣ Displayed when a total heat exchanger 8. display (See page 23.)
on the standard display. unit, such as the Ventiair, is connected. Ɣ Displayed when the key lock is set.
For details, refer to the Operation Manual
14.Clock (24 hours of the Ventiair.
real time clock) 9. display (See page 34.)
A 12:05
Auto Ɣ Displayed if the schedule timer or OFF
Heat Set temp Room 6. Message
13.Airflow direction reminder timer is enabled.
(Displayed only when 20°C 15.Detailed selection The following messages are displayed.
the air conditioner is in 20°C (with room “This function not available.”
10.Under Centralized control “ ”
operation.) temperature settings) Ɣ Displayed for a few seconds when an
Return Setting Ɣ Displayed if the system is under the
operation button is pressed if the indoor
management of central control equipment
<Detailed display example 1> unit is not provided with the corresponding
(optional accessories) and the operation of
function.
the system through the remote controller is
Clock display Ɣ If a number of indoor units are in operation,
prohibited.
3.Fan speed display (with no clock settings) the message will appear only if none of the
(with no fan speed indoor units is provided with the
control function) A --:-- 16. ( ) display corresponding function, i.e., the message 11. Changeover under control “ ”
Auto
Heat Set temp will not appear if at least one of the indoor (VRV only)
Detailed selection units is provided with the corresponding
Ɣ Displayed on the remote controller if the
20°C (with no detailed items function.
Airflow direction remote controller has no cooling/heating
selected) selection eligibility mode (see page 21).
display Return Setting
(with no airflow direction
settings) <Detailed display example 2>
10 English English 11
187
Remote Controller
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 10 5/15/2009 10:21:01

01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM 11 5/15/2009 10:21:02 AM
3
188
Names and Functions
3P243520-1B
12.Home leave “ ” (See page 19.)
Ɣ The home leave icon shows the status of
the home leave function.
ON Home leave is enabled
Remote Controller
FLASHING Home Leave is active

OFF Home Leave is disabled
13.Airflow direction “ ”
Ɣ Displayed when the airflow direction and
swing are set (see page 28).
Ɣ This item is not displayed if the system is
not provided with a function to set airflow
directions.
14.Clock (24 hours real time clock)

Ɣ Displayed if the clock is set (see page 48).
Ɣ If the clock is not set, “ -- : -- ” will be
displayed.
15.Detailed selection
Ɣ Displayed if the detailed display items are
selected (see page 47).
Ɣ No detailed items are by default selected.
16. display
Ɣ Displayed to inform that the clock needs
setting again.
Ɣ The schedule timer function will not work
unless the clock is set again.
12 English English 13
EDHK281006

01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 12 5/15/2009 10:21:03
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM 13 5/15/2009 10:21:03 AM
Contents 1. Safety Precautions 2.3.2
C: 3P243521-1
Also see installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
EDHK281006
Please read these “Safety Precautions” carefully before installing air conditioning
equipment and be sure to install it correctly.
1. Safety Precautions ............................ 2
Safety precautions
Ɣ The precautions described herein are classified as WARNING and CAUTION. They both contain
important information regarding safety. Be sure to observe all precautions without fail.
2. Accessories ....................................... 4
Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal
WARNING

3. Remote controller installation injury or loss of life.
Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property
procedure .......................................... 4
Installation Manual
CAUTION damage or personal injury, which may be serious depending on the

circumstances.
4. Functions and menu items
Ɣ After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer
of remote controller buttons .......... 10
how to operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the
customer to store the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
5. Power-on .......................................... 12
WARNING
6. Field setting method ....................... 13
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work.
Do not attempt to install the remote controller yourself. Improper installation may result in water
7. Test operation method leakage, electric shocks or fire.
(in the case of SkyAir) .................... 16 Consult your local dealer regarding relocation and reinstallation of the remote controller.
Improper installation work may result in leakage, electric shocks or fire hazards.
8. Checking procedure of Install the remote controller in accordance with the instructions in this installation manual.
error record ..................................... 19 Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in the unit falling, water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
9. Registration method of the
Install the remote controller on a foundation strong enough to withstand the weight of the remote
service contract .............................. 20 controller.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the remote controller falling and causing injury.
10. Confirmation of registered Electrical work must be performed in accordance with relevant local and national regulations and
details ............................................... 21 with instructions in this installation manual.
Be sure to use a dedicated power supply circuit only. Insufficiency of power circuit capacity and
improper workmanship may result in electric shocks or fire.
11. Clock Setting ................................... 22
Always perform installation work with the power supply shut-off.
Touch with energized electric parts causes an electric shock.
12. Language changeover .................... 22 Do not disassembly, reconstruct or repair.
Electric shock and/or fire are caused.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires are used, and that there is no strain on the
terminal connections or wires.
Improper connections or securing of wires may result in abnormal heat build-up or fire.
The choice of materials and installations must comply with the applicable national and international
standards.
English 1 2 English
189
Remote Controller
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 1 2/3/2009 1:19:14

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 2 2/3/2009 1:19:14 PM
3
190
2. Accessories
3P243521-1
CAUTION
The following accessories are included.
To avoid leakage and electric shock due to entry of water or insects, fill the wiring through hole with
Accessories
putty. Operation Installation

Wood screw Small screw Clamp Wiring retainer
To avoid electric shocks, do not operate with wet hands. manual manual
Do not wash the remote controller with water, as this may result in electric shocks or fire. (φ3.5×16) (M4×16)
Remote Controller
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from
televisions or radios to prevent picture interference and noise.
(Depending on the incoming signal strength, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient to eliminate (2 pcs.) (2 pcs.) (1 pc.) (1 pc.) (1 pc.) (1 pc.)
noise.)
Do not install the air conditioner in the following locations:
Plastic parts will deteriorate, parts may fall off and water leakage could result. 3. Remote controller installation
Corroding of copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage. procedure
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a
Remote controller installation procedure
malfunction of the unit. 3-1 Determine where to install the remote controller.
4. Where flammable gas may leak, where there is carbon fibre or ignitable dust suspensions in the Make sure to follow “ 1. Safety Precautions” when determining the location.
air, or where volatile flammables such as paint thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in fire. 3-2 Make a wiring through hole on the wall if the wires are taken
5. High temperature area or directly flamed point.
Heating and/or firing may be caused. out from the back side.
6. Moist area, or place where may be exposed to water. External view of the remote controller
If water enters inside of the remote controller, electric shock may be caused and inner electronics
may fail.
F8-10
When remote controller thermo function is used, select the installation location considering the
followings. Set the center of the wall hole
Lower case to the center of the wiring thro
Ɣ A place where average temperature in the room can be detected. Through hole ugh hole on the controller
40
Ɣ A place where is not exposed to direct sunlight.
lower case when making the
Ɣ A place where is far apart from heat source.
hole.
Ɣ A place where is not affected by outside air due to door opening/closing or the like.
48.5
CAUTION
Through If the hole size is too large or the location is not
hole proper, the hole may come out from the controller.
F8-10
3-3 Remove upper case.

Insert a screwdriver in the recess of lower case to remove the upper case (2 points).
Upper case
Remote controller PC-board is
installed on the upper case. Take care
not to damage the PC-board with the
Screwdriver
screwdriver.
Take care that dust or moisture does

not touch the PC-board of removed Lower case
Insert and twist the screwdriver
upper case.
lightly for removal.
English 3 4 English
EDHK281006

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 3 2/3/2009 1:19:14
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 4 2/3/2009 1:19:15 PM
3-4 Determine the direction of controller wiring outlet (back Sheath part in the remote controller case should be stripped.
Ca. 10mm
3P243521-1
outlet, left outlet, upper center outlet, upper outlet).
For easy wiring, it is better to
3-4-1 Back outlet 3-4-2 Left outlet keep ca. 10mm difference
EDHK281006
Peel the shield and sheath between the length of two wires.
Cutting guideline
of the wiring
Sheath stripping length:
Ɣ Ca. 150mm for upper outlet
Ɣ Ca. 200mm for upper center outlet

Cut off resin area (hatched area). Cut off thin area (hatched area) with nippers Connect the terminals (P/P1, N/P2) of the remote controller upper case with the terminals (P1, P2)
or the like, and then remove burr with a file or of the indoor unit. (P1 and P2 have no polarities.)
the like.
3-5-1 Back outlet
3-4-3 Upper outlet 3-4-4 Upper center outlet Ground the shielded Indoor unit
part on the indoor P1 P2
unit side. (NOTE.1)
Lower case
Upper case
PC-board
Cut off thin area (hatched area) with nippers Cut off thin area (hatched area) with nippers
or the like, and then remove burr with a file or or the like, and then remove burr with a file or Clamp Clamp
the like. the like.
3-5 Conduct wiring.

CAUTION
1. Switch box and transmission wiring are not attached. Cross-section -
2. Do not directly touch the remote controller PC-board.
Secure the wiring at
the wiring fixing point
Wiring Specifications Wiring fixing by using attached
point clamping material.
Wiring Type Sheathed vinyl cord or cable (2 wire) (NOTE)
Wiring Size 0.75-1.25mm² <Wiring fixing guideline>
NOTE NOTE
Shield wire (2 wire) can be used for remote controller wiring, but it must confirm to EMC 1) Shield wire (2 wire) can be used for remote controller wiring, but it must
(Electromagnetic Compatibility) (Australian regulation) confirm to EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) (Australian regulation)
.
English 5 6 English
191
Remote Controller
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 5 2/3/2009 1:19:16

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 6 2/3/2009 1:19:17 PM
3
192
3-5-2 Left outlet CAUTION
Indoor unit
3P243521-1
Ground the shielded Ɣ Perform wiring apart from a power line not to receive electrical noise (external noise)
part on the indoor P1P2 during the wiring.
unit side. (NOTE.1) Ɣ Seal wiring draw-in port securely with putty (field supply) to prevent entry of insects or
the like.
Lower case
Remote Controller
Upper case 3-6 Fixing procedure of lower case.

In the case of wiring center upward drawing or rearward drawing, see wiring procedure first as
PC-board wiring with the case is needed before fixing.
3-6-1 In the case of installation on the wall

Secure by using attached wood screws (2 pcs.).
3-5-3 Upper outlet
Wiring retainer
Wiring retainer Upper case
Wiring Install attached

wiring retainer to Wood screws
prevent wiring pinch (F3.5×16)
according to left
Cross-section - figure.
Ground the
3-6-2 In the case of installation on the switch box
shielded part on Secure by using attached small screws (2 pcs.).
the indoor unit Indoor unit
side. (NOTE.1) P1P2 Switch box for two units
Switch box
(with no cover)
(field supply)
(Use optional accessory
KJB211A)
Lower case
Upper case
84
PC-board
46
3-5-4 Upper center outlet
(Installation pitch)
Ground the shielded Indoor unit
part on the indoor P1P2
Small screws (M4×16)
unit side. (NOTE.1)
Wiring retainer
Lower case
Upper case
PC-board
English 7 8 English
EDHK281006

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 7 2/3/2009 1:19:17
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 8 2/3/2009 1:19:18 PM
Switch box for one unit
(with no cover) 4. Functions and menu items of remote
3P243521-1
Switch box
(field supply)
controller buttons
EDHK281006
(Use optional accessory

KJB111A) 4-1 Functions and menu items
(1) Operation mode selector button
84
(11) LCD (with backlight)

28 (4) Up button
(Installation pitch) (5) Down button
(6) Right button
(7) Left button
Small screws (M4×16)
(9) Operation lamp

CAUTION
(8) On/Off button
Ɣ Select flat place for installation face as possible.
Ɣ And, do not tighten the installation screws too much not to deform the lower case. (3) Menu/Enter button
(10) Cancel button

3-7 Install the upper case as original condition.
Functions and menu items of remote controller buttons
Ɣ Align the upper case with tabs of the lower case (6 points), inset and install the upper case.
Ɣ Install the wiring with care to prevent the pinch. (2) Fan speed control button
Ɣ Peel off a protective seal which is attached on the upper case.
(1) Operation mode selector button (4) Up button

Used to change the mode. Ɣ Used to raise the set temperature.
Ɣ The next items on the upper side will be
(2) Fan speed control button
highlighted.
Used to change the fan control.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled
(3) Menu/Enter button continuously when the button is kept
Ɣ Used to indicate the main menu. pressed.)
(For details of main menu, see the Ɣ Used to change the item selected.
operation manual.)
(5) Down button
Ɣ Used to enter the setting item selected.
Ɣ Used to lower the set temperature.
Main menu Ɣ The next items on the lower side will be
highlighted.
Set temp mode changeover (The highlighted items will be scrolled
Airflow Direction continuously when the button is kept
Quick Cool/Heat On/Off pressed.)
Ventilation Ɣ Used to change the item selected.
Timer setting
Service Contact/Model Info (6) Right button
Convenient functions Ɣ Used to highlight the next items on the
Setting status list right-hand side.
Clock setting Ɣ Display contents are changed to next
Language changeover screen per page.
∗Depending on connected model
English 9 10 English
193
Remote Controller
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 9 2/3/2009 1:19:19

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 10 2/3/2009 1:19:19 PM
3
194
(7) Left button
Field setting menu 5. Power-on
Ɣ Used to highlight the next items on the
3P243521-1
left-hand side. Test operation ON/OFF
Power-on
Ɣ Check for completion of indoor/outdoor units wiring.
Ɣ Display contents are changed to Register Service Contract Ɣ Check for closing of EL. COMPO. BOX cover of indoor and outdoor units before power-on.
previous screen per page. Field setting list
Group No. setting 5-1 Followings are displayed after <Main remote controller> <Sub remote controller>
(8) On/Off button
Indoor unit Airnet No. set power-on.
Press once to operate, and press once 5-1 Off reminder Timer 5-1 Off reminder Timer
Remote Controller
Outdoor unit Airnet No. set “Connection under check Connection under check Connection under check
again to stop. Please wait for a moment Please wait for a moment
Error record Please wait for a moment”
(9) Operation lamp Indoor status display
Outdoor status display During above display, backlight
Green lamp lights up during operation. The
does not light by button operation. Main remote contrl Main remote contrl
lamp will blink if an malfunction occurs. Fan forced operation ON
Main/Sub changeover When 1 indoor unit is
(10) Cancel button Filter element sign OFF
Ɣ Used to return to the previous screen. controlled by 2 remote Error code:U5 Error code:U5
Connection under check Connection under check
Ɣ Press and hold this button for 4 seconds ∗Depending on connected model controllers: Please wait for a moment Please wait for a moment
or longer to display field setting menu.
Be sure to set sub remote
(11) LCD (with backlight) controller during above display. Main remote contrl Main remote contrl
The backlight will be light for Press and hold 4 seconds or
approximately 30 seconds by pressing longer the Operation mode
any operation button. selector button of the remote <Basic screen>
controller to be set. Press and hold 4 seconds
When the display is changed from
5-2
or longer the Operation
CAUTION main remote controller to sub Fan Set temperature mode selector button of sub
remote controller side.
Ɣ Operate the button during backlight lit. remote controller, the setting is 28°C
However, On/Off may be operated concurrently with backlight lit. completed.
Return
Press the menu button
Ɣ When 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2 remote controllers, a remote controller backlight
which is operated first light. Connection under check
Please wait for a moment
Ɣ To operate Up/Down/Left/Right button, always press of the button.
5-2 Basic screen is displayed.
Sub remote contrl
CAUTION
If sub remote controller is not set at power-on in the case
of one indoor unit controlled by two remote controllers, <Basic screen>
4-2 Displays for button operation descriptions “Error code: U5” is displayed in the connection checking 5-2
screen.
<Field setting menu screen> Fan Set temperature
Select the sub remote controller by pressing the
Field setting 1/2 Operation mode selector button of either one of the 28°C
Highlighted display (selected items)
Test operation ON/OFF remote controllers for 4 seconds or longer.
Register Service Contract Return
If the basic screen is not displayed more than 2 minutes
Field setting list
Group No. setting after “sub remote controller” display, shut off the power
Indoor unit Airnet No. set In the highlighted display (selected items)
supply and check the wiring.
Outdoor unit Airnet No. set setting screen, button operation
Return Setting descriptions are displayed.
NOTE
When selecting a different language, refer to 12. Language changeover.
(See page 22.)
EDHK281006

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 11 2/3/2009 1:19:20
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 12 2/3/2009 1:19:20 PM
6. Field setting method 6-6 Press Menu/Enter button. Setting
confirmation screen is displayed.
3P243521-1
<Setting confirmation screen>
6-1 Press and hold Cancel button for <Basic screen> 6-7 Select Yes and press Menu/ 6-6 Field setting list
EDHK281006
4 seconds or longer. 6-1 Enter button. Setting details are Is it settled by setting?
6-7
Field setting menu is displayed. determined and field setting list
Fan Set temperature
screen returns. Yes No
6-2 Select Field setting list in the 28°C Return Setting
Field setting method
field setting menu, and press 6-8 In the case of multiple setting
Return
Menu/Enter button. changes, repeat “6-3” to “6-7”.
Field setting list screen is

displayed. 6-9 After all setting changes are com- Press Menu/Enter button.
pleted, press Cancel button
6-3 Highlight the mode, and select Press and hold Cancel
button for 4 seconds or twice.
desired “Mode No.” by using longer during backlight lit. Setting confirmation
(Up/Down) button. 6-10 Backlight goes out, and
“Connection under check
6-4 In the case of setting per indoor <Field setting menu screen> Please wait for a moment” is
unit during group control (When displayed for initialization. After
6-2 Field setting 1/2
Mode No. such as 20 , 21 , the initialization, the basic screen
Test operation ON/OFF
22 , 23 , 25 are selected), Register Service Contract returns.
Field setting list
highlight the unit No. and select Group No. setting
Indoor unit Airnet No. set
“Indoor unit No.” to be set by Outdoor unit Airnet No. set
using (Up/Down) button. Return Setting CAUTION
(In the case of group total setting, Ɣ When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor unit may be
this operation is not needed.) changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
Ɣ For field setting details of the outdoor unit, see installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
In the case of individual setting Press Menu/Enter button.
per indoor unit, current settings
are displayed. And, SECOND
CODE NO. “ - ” means no <Field setting screen> Mode FIRST SECOND CODE NO. Note) 2
function. No. CODE Description of setting
In the case of individual In the case of group total Note) 1 NO. 01 02 03 04
setting per indoor unit setting
Filter Contamination - Ultra
6-5 Highlight SECOND CODE NO. of Heavy/Light long life
Approx. Approx.
6-3 Field setting list 6-3 Field setting list
the FIRST CODE NO. to be 10.000 hrs. 5.000 hrs.
Unit No Mode Unit No Mode (Setting for spacing time filter
changed, and select desired 6-4 0 20 6-5 0 10 of display time to clean
0–01 1–00 2–00 3–00 0–01 1–
2–
3–
“SECOND CODE NO.” by using 6-5 4––– 5––– 6––– 7––– 4––– 5––– 6––– 7––– air filter) Long life Approx. Approx.
8––– 9––– a––– b––– 8––– 9––– a––– b––– 0 ———— ————
Light
(Setting for when filter filter 2.500 hrs. 1.250 hrs.

Heavy
(Up/Down) button. Multiple

Return Setting Return Setting contamination is heavy,
identical mode number settings
and spacing time of Standard Approx. Approx.
are available. SECOND CODE NO. display time to clean air filter 200 hrs. 100 hrs.
FIRST CODE (SW) NO. filter is to be halved)
In the case of group total 10 (20)
setting, all of SECOND CODE Long-life filter type (setting of filter
sign indication time). Long-life Ultra-long
NO. which may be set are 1 ———— ————
(Change setting when ultra-long filter life filter
displayed as “ ∗ ”. “ ∗ ” is filter is installed)
Press Menu/Enter button.
changed to SECOND CODE Thermostat sensor in remote
NO. to be set. And, SECOND 2 Use Not use ———— ————
controller
CODE NO. “ - ” means no Spacing time of display time to
function. clean air filter count (setting for Do not
3 Display ———— ————
when the filter sign is not to be display
displayed)
Setting number of connected Sky Air
simultaneous operation system
11 (21) 0 Pair Twin Triple Double twin
indoor units (setting for simultane-
ous operations system)
195
Remote Controller
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 13 2/3/2009 1:19:21

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 14 2/3/2009 1:19:21 PM
3
196
Mode FIRST SECOND CODE NO. Note) 2
No. CODE Description of setting
7. Test operation method (in the case of
3P243521-1
Note) 1 NO. 01 02 03 04
ON/OFF input from outside (setting
ON/OFF
SkyAir)
1 for when forced ON/OFF is to be Forced OFF ———— ————
operation ∗ In the case of VRV, see the manual attached to the outdoor unit.
operated from outside).
12 (22)
Thermostat differential changeover
2 (setting for when using remote 1°C 0.5°C ———— ————
Also see installation manuals attached to the indoor unit and the outdoor
Remote Controller
sensor). unit.
High air outlet velocity (for high
0 ≤ 2.7m > 2.7 ≥ 3.0m > 3.0 ≥ 3.5m ————
ceiling applications). Ɣ Check that wiring work of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is completed.
Selection of airflow direction (setting Ɣ Check that EL. COMPO. BOX cover of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is closed.
1 for when a blocking pad kit has 4-way flow 3-way flow 2-way flow ———— Ɣ After refrigerant piping, drain piping and electric wiring are completed, clean inside of the indoor unit
been installed). and decorative panel.
Selection of airflow function (setting Ɣ Perform the test operation according to following procedure.
13 (23) 3 for when using a decoration panel Equipped Not equipped ———— ————
for outlet).
4 Airflow direction range setting. Upper Normal Lower ———— 7-1 Make sure to turn on the power supply Notes for backlight
Setting the external static pressure more than 6 hours before operation Ɣ The backlight will be light for approximately
Normal High static Low static ————
(setting according to the connected start with front panel closed to protect 30 seconds by pressing any operation button.
6 pressure pressure
duct resistance) (for FHYK, follow compressor. Ɣ Operate the buttons during the backlight lit.
(Normal) (High ceiling) ———— ————
the high ceiling setting) However, On/Off can be operated concur-
Test operation method (in the case of SkyAir)
Drain pump operation with 7-2 Confirm that stop valves of both liquid rently with the backlight lit.
15 (25) 3 Equipped Not equipped ———— ————
humidifying. and gas are opened.
Thermostat sensor in remote <Make sure that outer panel and
1 controller (for limit operation and Not use Use ———— ———— piping cover is closed before
1c Home leave function only)
operation (danger of electric
3 Permission level setting Level 2 Level 3 ———— ———— <Basic screen>
shock). >
1e 2 Home leave function Not permitted Permitted ———— ———— ∗ After air purge by vacuum pump, 7-3
Notes) 1. Though setting is performed totally in the group, set Mode No. in the parenthesis when refrigerant pressure may not rise 7-4 Cool Set temperature
individual setting per indoor unit or checking after the setting should be performed. even though the stop valve is Press and hold Cancel
2. SECOND CODE NO. at factory shipment is set to “01”. However for the following cases it is opened. The reason is that refriger-
28°C button for 4 seconds or
Return Setting
longer during backlight lit.
set to “02”. ant system of the outdoor unit is
Ɣ Airflow direction range setting (except round flow cassette) blocked by electrical expansion valve
Ɣ Thermostat sensor in remote controller (SkyAir only) or the like. Operation is no problem.
Ɣ Thermostat sensor in remote controller for limit operation and Home leave function only <Field setting menu screen>
Ɣ Home leave function 7-3 Set the operation mode to cooling by 7-5 Field setting 1/2
3. Any function which the indoor unit does not have is not displayed. using the remote controller. Test operation ON/OFF
Register Service Contract
Field setting list
7-4 Press and hold Cancel button for Group No. setting
4 seconds or longer. Field setting Outdoor unit Airnet No. set
Return Setting Press Menu/Enter button.
menu is displayed.
7-5 Select Test operation ON/OFF in the

field setting menu, and press Menu/
Enter button. Basic screen returns and
“Test operation” is displayed.
EDHK281006

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 15 2/3/2009 1:19:22
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 16 2/3/2009 1:19:22 PM
7-6 Press On/Off button within about 7-6 CAUTION
10 seconds. The test operation starts.
3P243521-1
7-7 Cool Set temperature Ɣ If operation is not available due to any malfunction, refer to following Failure diagnosis method .
Check operation condition for
Press On/Off button Ɣ After the test operation finishes, check that error code record is not displayed in the Service
3 minutes. 28°C (within 10 seconds).
EDHK281006
∗ Note) In the case of above-men- Contact/Model Information screen of the main menu according to the following procedure.
Test Operation
tioned procedures 7-5 and

7-6 in reverse order, test 7-14 Press Menu/Enter button in the basic <Basic screen>
operation can start as well. screen. Main menu screen is dis-
<Main menu screen> played.
7-14
7-7 Press Menu/Enter button in the basic Cool Set temperature
7-8 MainMenu 1/2
screen. Main menu is displayed. 7-15 Select Service Contact/Model Info in

Set temp mode changeover 28°C
Airflow Direction the main menu, and press Menu/Enter
Quick Cool/Heat On/Off
7-8 In the case of a model having airflow Ventilation button. Return Setting Press Menu/Enter button.
Timer setting
direction setting function, select Service Contact/Model Info
Airflow Direction in the main menu Return Setting Press Menu/Enter button. 7-16 Service Contact/Model Information
and check that airflow direction is screen is displayed. Check that error <Main menu screen>
actuated according to the setting. code record is not displayed in the 7-15 MainMenu 1/2
For operation of airflow direction 7-9 Airflow Direction screen. Set temp mode changeover
Airflow Direction
setting, see the operation manual. Swing
∗ Screen which does not display the Quick Cool/Heat On/Off
error code record means normal Ventilation
Change the airflow Timer setting
7-9 After the operation of airflow direction status. Service Contact/Model Info
direction by using Press Menu/Enter button.
Return Setting
is confirmed, press Menu/Enter button. Return Setting
(Up/Down)button.
Basic screen returns. 7-17 If the error code record is displayed,
conduct the failure diagnosis referring
7-10 Press and hold Cancel button for to <Error code list> in the installation 7-16 Error code:U5
4 seconds or longer in the basic Contact address

Press Menu/Enter button. manual of the indoor unit. 7-17 0123–4567–8900
screen. After the failure diagnosis finishes,
Field setting menu is displayed. 7-10 press and hold On/Off button for Indoor unit –––/000 Press and hold On/Off
Outdoor unit –––/000
Cool button for 4 seconds or
Set temperature 4 seconds or longer in the “Service Return Setting
7-11 Select Test operation ON/OFF in the longer during backlight lit.
28°C Contact/Model Info” screen to erase
field setting menu, and press Menu/ Press and hold Cancel the error code record.
Enter button. Basic screen returns and Test Operation button for 4 seconds or
normal operation is conducted. longer during backlight lit.
Failure diagnosis method Cool Set temperature
7-12 Check the functions according to the Ɣ When the remote controller displays 28°C
operation manual. Test operation ON/OFF
any item in following table, inspect the Test Operat. CODE : U5
Register Service Contract details in the table.
Field setting list
7-13 When the decorative panel is not Group No. setting Ɣ If a error occurs, “code” is displayed in
installed, shut off the power supply Outdoor unit Airnet No. set the LCD like right figure.
after the test operation finishes. Conduct the failure analysis referring to
“Error code list” in the installation
Ɣ If interior work is not completed after the manual of the indoor unit.
test operation finish, explain to the <Basic screen>
And when the unit No. which detected
customer that operation should not be the error during group control is
performed until the interior work comple- confirmed, refer to “ 8.
Checking
tion to protect the indoor unit.
procedure of error record”.
(If the operation is performed, the
indoor unit may be contaminated with
the materials which arise from paints or
adhesives during the interior work, and
water splash or water leak may occur.)
197
Remote Controller
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 17 2/3/2009 1:19:22

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 18 2/3/2009 1:19:23 PM
3
198
Remote controller display Description
Ɣ Power outage, power voltage error or open-phase
9. Registration method of the service
3P243521-1
Ɣ Wrong wiring (between indoor and outdoor units)
No display
Ɣ Indoor PC-board assembly failure contract
Ɣ Remote controller wiring disconnection
Ɣ Remote controller failure Ɣ Registration of the service contract.
Ɣ Fuse blow (outdoor unit)
Display of
9-1 Press and hold Cancel button for 9-1 <Basic screen>
Remote Controller
Ɣ Indoor PC-board assembly failure 4 seconds or longer in the basic

“Connection under check
Ɣ Wrong wiring (between indoor and outdoor units)
Please wait for a moment” is turned on. ∗ screen.
Field setting menu is displayed. <Field setting menu screen>
∗ Though
“Connection under check 9-2 Field setting 1/2
Please wait for a moment” is displayed for 90 seconds at maximum after power-on, this does not mean a 9-2 Select Register Service Contract in Test operation ON/OFF
the field setting menu, and press Register Service Contract
failure. (Determine after 90 seconds.) Field setting list
Menu/Enter button. “Register service Group No. setting
contract” menu screen is displayed. Outdoor unit Airnet No. set
Checking procedure of error record
8. Checking procedure of error record 9-3 Select Register Service Contract ,

and press Menu/Enter button.
9-3 Register Service Contract
8-1 Press and hold Cancel button for 8-1 <Basic screen> 9-4 Enter the telephone number. None
4 seconds or longer in the basic Register Service Contract
Registration method of the service contract
Numeric varies by using (Up/

screen. Field setting menu is dis-
Down) button. Enter from the left end,
played. <Field setting menu screen> and blank digit should be left as “ - ”. Press Menu/Enter button.
Return Setting
8-2 Select Error record in the field setting Error record 9-5 Press Menu/Enter button.
menu, and press Menu/Enter button. Indoor status display
Outdoor status display Setting confirmation screen is
The error record menu screen is Fan forced operation ON 9-4 Register Service Contract 1/2
Main/Sub changeover displayed.
displayed. Filter element sign OFF Register Service Contract
9-6 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter ––––––––––––––––
8-3 Select Remote controller record in the button.
error record menu, and press Menu/
Setting details are determined and field Return Setting
Enter button. 8-3 Error record 2/2
setting menu screen returns.
Error codes and unit No. can be Remote controller record
Indoor unit record
confirmed in the error record display 9-7 Press Cancel button once. 9-5 Register Service Contract 1/2
screen. The basic screen returns. Register Service Contract
Return Setting
0123–456–7890–––
8-4 In the error record, 10 items from the
latest are displayed in order.
8-4 Remote controller record 1/3 Return Setting Press Menu/Enter button.
8-5 Press Cancel button in the error record Unit Error Date Time
8-5 01 –– –– –– / –– / –– ––:––
display screen 3 times. 02 –– –– –– / –– / –– ––:––
03 –– –– –– / –– / –– ––:––
The basic screen returns. 04 –– –– –– / –– / –– ––:–– <Setting confirmation screen>
Return Setting 9-6 Register Service Contract
Is it settled by setting?
Unit No.
Latest record Yes No
<Field setting menu screen>
EDHK281006

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 19 2/3/2009 1:19:24
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 20 2/3/2009 1:19:25 PM
10. Confirmation of registered details 11. Clock Setting
C: 3P243521-1
10-1 Press Menu/Enter button in the basic <Basic screen> 11-1 Press Menu/Enter button in the basic <Basic screen>
EDHK281006
screen.
10-1
screen. Clock setting
Main menu is displayed. Main menu is displayed.
Select Service Contact/Model Info in Cool Set temperature Select Clock setting in the main <Main menu screen>
the main menu, and press Menu/Enter menu, press Menu/Enter button.
28°C 11-1 MainMenu 2/2
button. Convenient functions
Language changeover
Return Setting Press Menu/Enter button. 11-2 Select “year”, “month”, “day” and “time” Setting status list
Clock setting
10-2 Press Cancel button twice. by using (Left/Right) button and Language changeover

The basic screen returns. set by using (Up/Down) button in
<Main menu screen> Return Setting Press Menu/Enter button.
the clock setting screen. During the
MainMenu 1/2
button is pressed and held, numeric
Set temp mode changeover changes continuously.
Confirmation of registered details
Airflow Direction
Quick Cool/Heat On/Off ∗ Day of the week is set automatically. 11-2 Clock setting
Ventilation Year 2008
Timer setting 11-3 Month 01
Service Contact/Model Info 11-3 Press Menu/Enter button. Day 01
Return Setting Press Menu/Enter button. Tuesday
Setting confirmation screen is displayed. 00:00
11-4 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
Service Contact/Model info Registered details button.
Contact address are displayed.
0123–4567–8900 Setting details are confirmed and basic
11-4 Clock setting
screen returns. Is it settled by setting?
Indoor unit –––/000
Outdoor unit –––/000
Return Setting ∗ If duration of power outage exceeds Yes No
48 hours, reset is needed.
<Basic screen>
12. Language changeover

12-1 Press Menu/Enter button in the basic <Basic screen>
screen.
Main menu is displayed.
Select Language changeover in the <Main menu screen>
main menu, press Menu/Enter button. 12-1 MainMenu 2/2
Convenient functions
12-2 Press (Up/Down) buttons to select Setting status list
Clock setting
“Language” on the language change- Language changeover
over screen.
English/Deutsch/ Français/Español/
Italiano/EȜȜȘȞȚțȐ/Nederlands/
Portugues/PyccƸɢɣ/Ɍürkçe
Pressing Menu/Enter button. 12-2 Language changeover
Selectable languages
Setting details are confirmed and basic
screen returns. English
Return Setting
199
Remote Controller
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 21 2/3/2009 1:19:25

01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM 22 2/3/2009 1:19:26 PM
3
2.4 Wireless Remote Controller
Model series
Name of option
FCQ FHQ FBQ
Remote controller Wireless type BRC7F632F BRC7E66 BRC4C64
Figure 1
1-1
1
ON OFF
8
1-2
3 H M L
DOWN
10
C ON OFF
UP
6
TEMP
FAN H M L TIME
11
4 C
hr. UP
9 DOWN
FAN
2 hr. 13
RESERVE CANCEL
hr.
5 TIMER 12
hr.
TEST MODE 15
7
SWING 14
16
TEST
TEST 17
3P107422-11J
Figure 2 (explanation of receiver)
FCQ FHQ
22 23
22 23
18
19 21 20 18
19
20 21
3P107422-11J 3P107422-8S
FBQ (separate type)
18
20
22
19
21
23
3P107422-21S

Names and functions of the operating section (fig. 1, 2)
DISPLAY “ ” (SIGNAL TRANSMIS- 14 AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON

SION) OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
1
This lights up when a signal is being trans- 15 Press this button to select OPERATION
mitted. MODE.
DISPLAY “ ”“ ”“ ”“ ” FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
“ ” (OPERATION MODE) 16 Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE in

the operation manual attached to the
2 This display shows the current OPERA- indoor unit.
TION MODE. For cooling only type,
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
“ ” (Auto) and “
installed.
” (Heating) are not 17 This button is used only by qualified ser- 3
vice persons for maintenance purposes.
DISPLAY “
H M L
” (SET TEMPERATURE) EMERGENCY OPERATION SWITCH
3 C 18 This switch is readily used if the remote
This display shows the set temperature. controller does not work.
RECEIVER
DISPLAY “ hr. hr. ”
19 This receives the signals from the remote
4 (PROGRAMMED TIME)
controller.
This display shows PROGRAMMED TIME
OPERATING INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
of the system start or stop.
5 DISPLAY “ 20 This lamp stays lit while the air
” (AIR FLOW FLAP) conditioner runs. It flashes when the unit is
in trouble.
DISPLAY “ ”“ ” (FAN SPEED)
6 TIMER INDICATOR LAMP (Green)
The display shows the set fan speed. 21
This lamp stays lit while the timer is set.
DISPLAY “ TEST ” AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME
(INSPECTION/ TEST OPERATION) INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
7 When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERA- 22
Lights up when it is time to clean the air fil-
TION BUTTON is pressed, the display ter.
shows the system mode is in.
DEFROST LAMP (Orange)
ON/OFF BUTTON
23 Lights up when the defrosting operation
8 Press the button and the system will start. has started. (For cooling only type this
Press the button again and the system will lamp does not turn on.)
stop.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON NOTES
• For the sake of explanation, all indications are
9 Press this button to select the fan speed,
shown on the display in Figure 1 contrary to
HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
actual running situations.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON • Fig. 1-2 shows the remote controller with the
10 Use this button for SETTING TEMPERA- front cover opened.
TURE (Operates with the front cover of the • If the air filter cleaning time indicator lamp
remote controller closed.) lights up, clean the air filter as explained in the
PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON operation manual provided with the indoor
unit.
Use this button for programming “START
11 and/or STOP” time. (Operates with the After cleaning and reinstalling the air filter,
press the filter sign reset button on the remote
front cover of the remote controller
controller. The air filter cleaning time indica-
opened.)
tor lamp on the receiver will go out.
12 TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON • The Defrost Lamp will flash when the power is
13 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON turned on. This is not a malfunction.
C : 3P107422-11J

FCQ EDHK281006
3. FCQ
3.1 BYCP125K-W1 — Decoration Panel
1. PRECAUTIONS
• Refer also to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
2. ACCESSORIES
• Installation manual.
3. NOTE TO INSTALLER
• Be sure to instruct the customer how to properly operate the system showing him/her the attached
operation manual.
2. PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL

〈〈For this unit, you are able to select air flow directions. To discharge air in 2 or 3 directions, it is necessary
to purchase optional blocking pad kit.〉〉
HANDLING OF DECORATION PANELS

• Never place the panel facing down nor lean it against a wall nor leave it on a projecting object.
• Never touch or put pressure on the swing flap.
(The swing flap may malfunction)
(1) Remove the suction grille from the decoration panel.
1 Press the lever on the suction grille and lift the lever side. (Refer to Fig. 1)
2 Detach the suction grille from the decoration panel by lifting the grille up approximately 45 degrees.
(Refer to Fig. 2)
3 Remove the transporting cardboard (in 4 locations) from the main unit. (Refer to Fig. 3)
4 Remove the transporting tape (in 4 locations) on the back of the suction grille. (Refer to Fig. 4)
Corner section
decoration cover
Suction grille
45
Decoration
panel
Lever Swing flaps
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1
3PA64319-13Q

EDHK281006 FCQ
(2) Remove the corner section decoration cover.

• Lift the four corner decoration covers in the direction of the arrow and remove. (Refer to Fig. 5)
Cardboard Corner section

Tape decoration cover
Suction grille
Rear side of the suction grille 3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
3. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL TO THE INDOOR UNIT BODY

〈〈Refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for the installation of the indoor unit. 〉〉
(1) Match the “PIPING SIDE” and “DRAIN SIDE” displays on the decoration panel with the position of the pip-
ing section and drain section on the indoor unit.
(2) Install the decoration panel

1 Temporarily install the decoration panel to the indoor unit by hanging the temporary latch of the deco-
ration panel to the hook of the indoor unit body. (2 locations)
2 Hook the four mounting brackets on the corner sections of the decoration panels onto the hooks around
the main indoor unit body.
(Make sure at this time that the swing motor lead wire does not get caught between the decoration panel
and the main unit.)
3 Screw all 4 hexagon head screws located right beneath the latches in approximately 5 mm. (Panel will rise)
4 Adjust the decoration panel by turning it to the arrowed direction in Fig. 6 so that the ceiling opening is
completely covered.
Mounting bracket Hook

Drain 2
Piping section
section
1 Hook
(4 locations)
Temporary latch (2 locations)

“PIPING SIDE” marking
“DRAIN SIDE” marking
3 5
4
Fig. 6
2
3PA64319-13Q

FCQ EDHK281006
5 Tighten the screws until the thickness of the sealing material between the decoration panel and the
indoor unit body reduces to 5-8 mm.
Sealing material
Indoor unit
5 - 8mm
Ceiling
material
Swing flaps
Decoration panel
[ PRECAUTIONS ]
• Improper screwing of the screws may cause the Air leak
troubles shown in Fig. 7 Screw properly.
Air leak from ceiling
Contamination Dew formation, dew dripping
Fig. 7
• If gap is still left between the ceiling and the decoration panel after screwing the screws, readjust the indoor
unit body height. (Refer to Fig. 8)
Adjustment of the indoor unit body

height from the holes in the corner
of the decoration panel is possible
if the indoor unit is kept leveled and
the drain piping, etc. is unaffected.
No gap is allowed
Fig. 8
(3) Wiring of the decoration panel (Refer to Fig. 9)

6 Remove the electric components box lid.
7 Connect the connectors for swing flap motor lead wire installed on the decoration panel.
8 Replace the electric components box lid reversing the procedure to remove it.
Make sure that the swing flap motor lead wire is not caught between the electric components box and its lid,
and between the indoor unit body and the decoration panel.
3
C: 3PA64319-13Q

EDHK281006 FCQ
7 Swing flap motor lead wire

Decoration panel side
Connector
Connect securely
Indoor unit side

3
Hooks
Swing flap motor lead wire Screw 6 8 Electric

<Wiring Diagram> (2 locations) components box lid
(The orientation of the indoor unit is changed
Loosen the two screws, slide the cover
for purposes of description.)
in the direction of the arrows,
Fig. 9 and disengage from the hooks.
4. INSTALLATION OF SUCTION GRILLE AND SERVICE COVER

(1) Install the suction grille
Install by reversing the procedure shown in “PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL”.
It is possible to install the suction grille in 4 directions by turning the suction grille.
Change the direction when adjusting the direction of the suction grille of multiple units or in meeting
customers’ demands.
Install the suction grill.

1 Tilt the suction grill at a 2 Hook up the strings of the suction grill to the fixtures of the 3 Slowly push the suction
45˚ angle and fix 3 hooks body corners (2 places) as shown below. grill up and lastly, ensure
to the decoration panel. the grill is fastened to the
NOTE: decoration panel body,
When mounting the String
keeping pressing 2 knobs.
suction grill, strings may
be caught in the grill.
Be sure that It should not
strings do not Suction grill hang outside.
Decoration hang out of the
suction grill edges.
panel body
String Fixture
String Fixture
String
When installing the grill,

Suction grill change the direction of
the strings.
Suction grill
NOTE :
Be careful not to get swing flap motor lead wire get caught when installing the suction grille.
C : 3PA64319-13Q

FCQ EDHK281006
(2) Install the corner section decoration cover.

1 Attach the string of the corner section decoration cover to the pin of the decoration panel. (Refer to Fig. 10)
2 Install the corner section decoration cover over the decoration panel. (Refer to Fig. 11)
Hole
Hole
Attach by inserting the
Hole
five tabs on the corner
section decoration cover
Tab
Tab into the holes on the
Tab decoration panel.
Fig. 10 Fig. 11
4
C : 3PA64319-13Q

EDHK281006 FCQ
3.2 KDBH55K160F — Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet

KDBH55K160 / KDBH55K160F
Dimensions Unit:mm
Sealing materials for long air outlets (Polyethylene foam t10): 2 pieces Sealing materials for horizontal blades (Polyethylene foam t10): 8 pieces
Slit
Sealing materials for air outlets at the corner (Polyethylene foam t10): 1 piece for each
Tape for sealing materials Tape for sealing materials Tape for sealing materials
for long air outlets (Non-woven fabric t0.6): 2 for air outlets at the corner (Non-woven fabric t0.6): 3 for air outlets at the corner (Non-woven fabric t0.6): 1
Slit
Side insulation plate (NB foam t10) : 2
Antisweat material (Flocking tape): See right Applicable part number Q'ty and colour
4, grey
4 for each, Dark grey or black
Antisweat material (Flocking tape): See right Applicable part number Q'ty and colour
4, grey
4 for each, Dark grey or black
J : D3K05112

FCQ EDHK281006
Installation
Precautions
Use this manual with the installation manuals attached to the indoor unit's main body and decoration panel.
When other separately-sold products are mounted, the 3-way blow and 2-way blow may not be selected.
For details, refer to the Engineering Data or catalog.
Parts content Check the following parts.
Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Longitudinal air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet
Name Longitudinal air outlet sealing material
sealing material A sealing material B1 sealing material B2 sealing material C sealing material D tape for fixing the sealing material tape for fixing the sealing material tape for fixing the sealing material
Number of pieces 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D 2
Shape/Symbol 2
A B2 4
4 B1 C
3 3
Name Absorbent (Inside 1) Absorbent (Inside 2) Absorbent (Outside) Absorbent (Bridge centre) Absorbent (Bridge outside)
The sticking procedure for absorbent
Number of pieces 2 1 1 2 2 2 differs with classes 28 to 56 and with
10 Use only classes 28 to 56 11 Use only classes 63 to 160 12 Use only classes 28 to 56 13 14 15 Use only classes 28 to 56 classes 63 to 160.
Shape/Symbol (Refer to 2 Sticking of absorbent to air outlet.)
24mm×328mm 24mm×410mm 24mm×290mm 8mm×505mm 47mm×47mm
Horizontal
Name Side insulator plate Horizontal blade absorbent
blade sealant
With 4-blade With 8-blade (2 colours) With 4-blade With 8-blade (2 colours)
Number of pieces 2 KDBH55K160F KDBH55K160 KDBH55K160F KDBH55K160
8 pieces
16 17 18 15mm×200mm 19
Shape/Symbol
100mm×1480mm ( With KDBH55K160, two colours are available,
gray and black, matching the blade colours. ) ( With KDBH55K160, two colours are available,
gray and black, matching the blade colours. ) 10mm×95mm
Blow Direction Selection and Sealing Material Mounting
(1) Blow direction selection

Depending on the installation location, select a blow direction from the table below. For the setting position number, refer to Field Setting .
For the selection of installation location, refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit's main body.
Precautions Blow direction patterns other than those shown in the figure below cannot be selected. (Condensation may occur.)
4-way
Air outlet B1, B2
3 3 3 3 3
Pipe side Drain side
Air outlet 2
Air outlet 3
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
Air outlet A Air outlet C 1 1 1 1 1
4-way 3-way
3 3 3 3 3
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
Drain side
1 1 1 1 1
3-way 2-way
3 3 3 3 3
Air outlet 1 Air outlet 4
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
Air outlet D
Pipe side
1 1 1 1 1
2-way
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(2) Matching with the corner air outlets A to D that are to be blocked, stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material.
(Stick the sealing material so that the sealing material comes to the positions shown in the schematic diagram.) (3) Stick the sealing material that was prepared in
(2) to the air outlet of indoor unit main body.
Sealing material 3 Sealing material 4
Sealing material 2
Release paper B1 B2
A
) )
(12 (12
2 Tape for fixing the sealing material 8 Tape for fixing the sealing material 8
) (12 (12
(12 )
Air outlet B1 )
Air outlet B2
Procedure 1
Remove the
release paper.
( When the indoor unit's main
body belongs to classes 28 to 56
) ( When the indoor unit's main body
belongs to classes 63 to 160 )
(12
) Tape for fixing the sealing material 8 Sealing material 5
C
D
Sealing material 6 Air outlet

Procedure 2 (12
)
Air outlet A
Stick the sealing material to the
(12) (12
tape for fixing the sealing material. )
With air outlets B to D , using the same procedure, Tape for fixing the sealing material 8 Tape for fixing the sealing material 9 Indoor unit main body
stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material as shown in the figure. Air outlet C Air outlet D
The sealing material has a directional property. Be sure to stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material so that the printed number of outlet to be blocked becomes visible.
Precautions
When blocking both the air outlet 1 and air outlet D , start the sticking of sealing material with the air outlet D .
(4) Matching the longitudinal air outlet numbered 1 to 4 that are to be blocked, prepare the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material. (5) Stick the sealing material that was prepared in
Cut both the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material along the perforation (dotted line). (4) to the air outlet of indoor unit main body.
Stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material.
(Stick so that the sealing material comes to the centre of tape for fixing the sealing material.) Indoor unit main body
Example) When blocking air outlet 2 or 3 Sealing material 1
2
4 3 Procedure 1
Procedure 2 Cut off
Remove the 3
release paper.
Release paper
Tape for fixing the sealing material 7 Air outlet 1
Procedure 3
<Sealing material treatment> Stick the sealing material so that it comes
to the centre of tape for fixing the sealing material. <Mounting to air outlet>
∗ When blocking the air outlet 1 , the sealing material preparation is not necessary.
Precautions The sealing material has a directional property. Be sure to stick the sealing material to
the tape for fixing the sealing material so that the printed number of outlet to be blocked becomes visible.
J : 1P177350A

EDHK281006 FCQ
Sticking of Absorbent to Air Outlet
Stick the absorbent indicated in the table below to the air outlet that was not blocked in 1 according to the procedure shown in the figure below.
If the sticking of absorbent is omitted, condensation may occur.

Classes 28 to 56 Classes 63 to 160 Precautions
To positions where the absorbent is already stuck,
Air outlet 1 the sticking of absorbent is not necessary.
Air outlet 2 Absorbent 10 13 14 Total 3 pieces
Air outlet 3 Absorbent 10 13 14 15 Total 4 pieces Absorbent 11 13 14 Total 3 pieces
Air outlet 4 Absorbent 12 15 Total 2 pieces
Classes 28 to 56
ce
ren
refe
king 10
Stic St
ce Air outlet 3 13 ick
ing
ren 13 re
efe St fer
3
r ick en
k ing ing ce
Stic re 10 13 Sticking reference
fer (Upper surface)
10 en
ce
13 Sticking reference
14 (Upper surface)
Stic
kin
g re
fere
nce
10 10
14 14
10
13 13
Sticking reference ce
en e) ce 15
fer c ren
(Upper surface) re ren refe 14
ing efe king St 15
S t ick tre r Stic (C ickin
en g
S
(C tick
en 14 tre refe
14 (C en ing
re re tre re
fer nc
en e
ce re fer
) fe en
re ce
nc
View e) View
nce
refere
king
Air outlet 2 Stic (Upper surface)
15
15
12
nce
fere
g re
kin
Stic
12
(5)
(5)
15 Cross section -
Sticking not necessary
15
Cross section -
e
renc 11
Classes 63 to 160 king
refe St
Stic ick
ing
13
re
fer
Air outlet 3 en
ce
11 13 Sticking reference
n ce (Upper surface)
e fere
gr
ckin
Sti
14
11
14
Air outlet 2 13
14
St
Sticking not necessary (C ickin
en g
tre refe
re re
fer nc
en e
ce
)
View

Sticking not necessary Sticking not necessary
continued on back side
JC : 1P177350A

FCQ EDHK281006
Sticking of Insulator to Indoor Unit Main Body
For safety, be sure to shut off power supply before starting the insulator sticking operation, decoration panel mounting operation, and connecting of connectors for swinging.
Precautions If the sticking of insulator is omitted, condensation may occur.

Stick the side insulator plate 16 according to the figure below.
Side insulator plate 16
For a wiring takeoff point with two sections, make a slit on
the side insulator plate 16 as shown in the figure below,
Side insulator plate 16 then route the wiring.

Side insulator plate 16 Side insulator plate 16
Wiring
Wiring
Slit Slit
Wiring takeoff point Superimpose the surplus section.
Sticking of Absorbent to Panel Horizontal Blade
Perform the operation on soft cloth to prevent damage to the panel.

2 Stick the horizontal blade sealing pad 19 to the backside of the blade. (For both left and right)
Perform sticking for the horizontal blades of all air outlets.
Do not apply force to the horizontal blade. (Application of force may lead to horizontal blade
swing failure.)
According to the figure below, stick the horizontal blade absorbent 17 and 18 as well as the horizontal blade
sealing pad 19 .
(With KDBH55K160, stick the horizontal blade absorbent with matching blade colour.)
Precautions When the sticking of absorbent and sealant is omitted, condensation may occur.
1 Stick the horizontal blade absorbent 17 in line with the blade shape to the front face of the horizontal blade.
Horizontal blade
Horizontal blade absorbent 17

Horizontal blade sealing pad 19
A 19 Sticking reference
Using the base of the rib as a reference, stick without leaving any gap.
Rib
Horizontal blade
Horizontal blade
Front face 3 Stick the horizontal blade absorbent 18 in between the horizontal blade sealing pad 19 .
Backside
A-A cross section

Horizontal blade sealing pad 19 18 Sticking reference
B
B B-B cross section
Field Setting
Depending on the installation status of the indoor unit's main body, the field setting needs to be performed by remote control operation.
Perform the setting by switching among the following three items: "Mode number", "Setting switch number", and "Setting position number".
The setting procedure and operation method are described in "How to perform field setting" attached to the remote control.
(1) Setting by number of air outlets used
While referring to "How to perform field setting" attached to the remote control, perform the setting according to the table
in the right.
Also, when the corner air outlet is blocked with 4-way blow, set the wind direction slightly downward.
[Setting content] (Setting by number of air outlets used)
(Note) When the installation height becomes higher than the standard, the setting by ceiling height in (2) becomes (Number of air outlets used) Mode number Setting switch number Setting position number
necessary.
3-way blow 02
13 (23) 1
(2) Setting by ceiling height 2-way blow 03
For the ceiling height, refer to the guidelines of ceiling height and number of air outlets used, then perform the setting for [Setting content] (Setting for when corner air outlet is blocked with 4-way blow)
each air outlet used according to the table below.
(Wind direction) Mode number Setting position number
(Guidelines of ceiling height and number of air outlets used) Standard 02
13 (23) 4
Number of air outlets used Slightly downward 03
Types 28 to 90 Types 112 to 160 [Setting content] (Setting by ceiling height)
Indoor unit
All-around blow 4-way blow 3-way blow 2-way blow All-around blow 4-way blow 3-way blow 2-way blow Mode number Setting position number
Ceiling height
Standard 2.7m or less 3.1m or less 3.0m or less 3.5m or less 3.2m or less 3.4m or less 3.6m or less 4.2m or less Standard 01
High ceiling 1 3.0m or less 3.4m or less 3.3m or less 3.8m or less 3.6m or less 3.9m or less 4.0m or less 4.2m or less High ceiling 1 13 (23) 0 02
High ceiling 2 3.5m or less 4.0m or less 3.5m or less 4.2m or less 4.5m or less 4.2m or less High ceiling 2 03
Values for ceiling height are provided as reference.
J : 1P191031A

EDHK281006 FCQ
3.3 KDBP55H160FA — Panel Spacer

KDBP55H160FA Model
KDBP55H160FA
Item
Exterior Fresh White
Material Outside frame: Resin

Insulation: Polyethylene foam
Fixture : 4 pieces
Screws : 1 set
Accessories
Sealing material : 1 set
Installation manual.
Mass (Weight) kg 1.2
· Using the panel spacer in areas of the ceiling Caution
with limited space makes it possible to install · When the panel spacer is installed, it is not possible to have 2-way air outlet. 3
the air conditioner. · Refer to the installation manual for both indoor unit and the panel spacer for
· Hides the gap between the decoration panel its installation.
and the ceiling.
Dimensions Unit:mm
4-φ5 Hole
J : D3K04626

FCQ EDHK281006
Installation
C : 1P136564E

EDHK281006 FCQ
1P136564E

FCQ EDHK281006
3.4 KDDP55K160(K) — Fresh Air Intake Kit (Chamber Type)

KDDP55K160 (without T-shape, without Fan) Model
KDDP55K160
Item
Fresh air intake method Fresh air intake by air conditioning fan
Diameter of connection duct φ150
Dimensions Unit:mm
1 Indoor unit main body
Inspection hole o 450 or more
(See note 2)
2 Decoration panel
3 Suction chamber
4 Connecting port chamber (right)
5 Connecting port chamber (left)
Accessories
Screws (M5×12) : 4 pieces
Sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Tape for fixing sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Installation manual

(See note 2)
How to establish an inspection hole
(Note 7)
Resistance in the passage inside the chamber
Static pressure in the chamber
Note)
1. Maximum length of the duct is 4 meters.
2. When installing this kit, an inspection hole is required (Ceiling opening dimension)
(in order to maintain this kit). Establish an inspection holes on either side.
3. This kit is field assembly.
4. Install the hanging fixing for the T joint. Otherwise the load from T-shape pipe Airflow rate
assembly, etc., could create a gap between the indoor unit and suction chamber.
5. When mounting the duct fan, be sure to use the wiring modification adaptor to
interlock with the indoor unit fan. Indoor unit Mountable Indoor unit models
6. With the intake wind volume, 10% or less of the "H" wind volume of the indoor unit Classes 28 to 90 FCQ(N)71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA
BYCP125K-W1 SkyAir
is recommended. Classes 112 to 160 F C Q 7 1 K / 1 0 0 K / 1 2 5 K / 1 4 0 K V LT
7. This graph shows values from the inlet of the T joint through that of the
indoor unit when KDDP55K160K (with a T joint) is connected.
JC : D3K05058

EDHK281006 FCQ
KDDP55K160K (with T-shape, without Fan) Model

KDDP55K160K
Item
Fresh air intake method Fresh air intake by air conditioning fan
Dimensions Unit:mm

1 Indoor unit main body
(See note 2)
Flexible duct
2
3
Decoration panel
Suction chamber
3
(Accessory)
4 Connecting port chamber (right)
5 Connecting port chamber (left)
Accessories
Screws (M5×12) : 4 pieces
Sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Tape for fixing sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Installation manual

(See note 2)
How to establish an inspection hole
(Note 7)
Resistance in the passage inside the chamber
T joint Suction duct
(Accessory) (Accessory)
Plate band (Accessory)
Static pressure in the chamber

Hanging fitting (Field supplied)
(See note 4)
Note)
1. Maximum length of the duct is 4 meters.
2. When installing this kit, an inspection hole is required
(in order to maintain this kit). Establish an inspection
holes on either side. (Ceiling opening dimension)
3. This kit is field assembly. Airflow rate
4. Install the hanging fixing for the T joint. Otherwise the load
from T-shape pipe assembly, etc., could create a gap between
the indoor unit and suction chamber.
5. When mounting the duct fan, be sure to use the wiring modification Indoor unit
Mountable Indoor unit models
adaptor to interlock with the indoor unit fan. BYCP125K-W1
Classes 28 to 90
SkyAir FCQ(N)71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA
6. With the intake wind volume, 10% or less of the "H" wind volume Classes 112 to 160 F C Q 7 1 K / 1 0 0 K / 1 2 5 K / 1 4 0 K V LT
of the indoor unit is recommended.
7. This graph shows values from the inlet of the T joint through that of the
indoor unit when KDDP55K160K (with a T joint) is connected.
JC : D3K05059

FCQ EDHK281006
Installation
Recommendations
Caution After thoroughly reading these "Safety precautions", properly perform the installation.
· This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner
• For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must always be used. <Round flow>.
If the specified components are not used, the kit may fall or an air leak may occur. · According to the table to the left, check the model name of the indoor unit, then mount the kit.
• After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no abnormality is present. · At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and to the
one for the decoration panel.
· When mounting the duct fan, be sure to use the wiring modification adaptor [KRP1C63] to
Combination table
interlock with the indoor unit fan.
Model name Installable indoor unit / Panel model name For the intake wind volume, 10% or less of the indoor unit wind volume of "H" is
recommended.
FCQ(N)71K/100K/125K/140KVEA When the intake wind volume becomes excessive, operation noise may become louder or
SkyAir
FCQ71K/100K/125K/140KVLT the intake temperature detection of the indoor unit may be affected.
· Be sure to mount the supplied sensor assembly.
KDDP55K160 (K)
<For the duct used for field connection, those in the table below are recommended.>
Panel BYCP125K-W1 Name 14 Partition plate
Part name Part number
K-FDS151D (1m)
Shape
Flexible duct K-FDS152D (2m)
(Nominal diameter φ150) K-FDS153D (3m)
Parts content Check the following parts. (Shaded part is included in a different package.) K-FDS154D (4m) Number KDDP55K160 1
of pieces KDDP55K160K 1
Name 1 Suction chamber 2 Connecting chamber (left) 3 Connecting chamber (right) 4 Corner air outlet 5 Corner air outlet tape for 6 Mounting screw 7 Sensor assembly 8 Clamp 9 Mounting screw 10 T joint 11 Flexible duct 12 Sealing pad 13 Installation manual
sealing material fixing the sealing material (for sensor)
Shape A
M5 × 12 (this document)
Number KDDP55K160 1 1 1 2 2 4 1 2 1 1
of pieces KDDP55K160K 1 1 1 2 2 4 1 2 1 1 2 4 1
Selection of Installation Location and Establishment of Inspection Opening
(1) Refer to the figure below to select the installation location. (2) Establish an inspection opening. Inspection opening ( 450 or more)
(Refer to *2.)
*1 Duct (arrangement at site)
*1. Install the suspension bracket for

the T joint section.
Because of the load from T joint,
Inspection opening
etc., a gap may be created in
Indoor unit main body 455mm (ceiling opening
dimension) between the indoor unit and
suction chamber.
Indoor unit (mm)
*2. Establish an inspection opening ( 450 or more). Inspection opening ( 450 or more)
classes 28 to 90 306 Establish an inspection opening to either side. 725 (Refer to *2.)
BYCP125K-W1
classes 112 to 160 348
Mounting of Sensor Assemblies and Suction Chamber
* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with precautions below.
• Shut off power supply before performing operation.
• Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit main body.
(For details, refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.)
<Mounting of sensor assembly>
<Mounting of suction chamber>
(1) According to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit main * Figure shows an example where the indoor unit main body is newly
body, remove the cover of the control box. installed.
(2) Using the supplied screws, tighten the sensor assembly together with (1) Stick the corner air outlet tape for fixing the sealing material 5 to
the bell mouth to the indoor unit main body.
the corner air outlet sealing material 4 , then stick it to the air outlet
(Mount without pinching the float switch lead wire.)
(3) Remove the connector (X16A) of the existing sensor from the PC of the indoor unit main body. (2 positions) Figure 1 Figure 2
board of the indoor unit main body. (2) Mount the suction chamber 1 to the indoor unit main body using
(4) Connect the lead wire of the mounted sensor assembly to the the hook (4 positions). Figure 3 to Figure 5
connector (X16A) on the PC board of the indoor unit main body as
For the fixing method of the hook, refer to Figure 4 , then mount at
shown in the figure below.
(5) As shown in the figure below, fix the lead wire using the supplied 4 positions.
clamp. * Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and suction
(6) After all the wiring is completed, fit the control box cover according to chamber match. Figure 4 Figure 6
the installation manual attached to the main body.
(7) Making sure that the control box cover is covered with the partition
plate 14 , tighten these together using the screws on the cover. (Hook
the partition plate tab onto the cover.) Figure 1 Corner air outlet sealing material 4 Figure 3
Fixing screw 9 Release paper Suction chamber 1 To Figure 4
A
Sensor assembly 7 (2) Using the supplied
) Procedure 1
Bell mouth screws, tighten the (12 2
sensor assembly Remove the
together with the bell release paper.
mouth. (5) Tighten with the float switch
(5) Tighten with the lead wire of the indoor unit (12 Hook
)
existing wiring. main body. Tape for fixing the sealing material 5 (4 positions)
(4) Connect the connector of the Clamp 8

mounted sensor assembly. Sensor assembly 7 Procedure 2 Indoor unit
* The figure main body
Stick the sealing material to the tape for
shows SkyAir
fixing the sealing material. (2 pieces)
Partition plate 14
(7) Using screws, tighten the
partition plate together with X16A
Figure 2 For 2 positions Sensor assembly
the control box cover so that Refrigerant piping
|PS<
WHITE
the box cover is covered
with the partition plate. Air outlet Control box cover
Float Indoor unit main body Suspension bracket
Control box cover
switch
(1) Remove the control box (4 positions)
lead wire
cover. (Screws at 2 positions) (3) Disconnect the connector of
the existing sensor. Bell mouth
JC : 3K017588D

EDHK281006 FCQ
Figure 4 Mounting status Figure 5 Status after mounting Figure 6 Drawing of mounting at completion
Suction chamber 1 Hook Hook
Hook Suction chamber 1
Indoor unit main body
Suspension bracket
Match the contour
Fixing method of hook
Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket Indoor unit main body
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and Suction Chamber
• Install the indoor unit main body and suction chamber.

At the time of installation, perform the engineering work according to the installation
(mm)
manual attached to the indoor unit main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure Suspension bracket
to the right.)
• When mounting the suction chamber to the existing indoor unit main body, change the Indoor unit BYCP125K-W1 185
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height in the figure to the right. main body
3
Mounting of Connecting Chamber and Connection of Flexible Duct
Suction chamber
Ceiling surface
Mount the connecting chamber. (1 piece each for left and right, a total of 2 pieces) Figure 7
(1) Press the square hole area of the connecting chamber 2 ( 3 ) into the hook
section (tab) of the suction chamber 1 . (2 positions)
(2) Using the supplied screws 6 , fix the connecting chamber. (2 positions)
Connecting chamber left (right) 2 ( 3 ) Square hole

(Procedure 1) <How to Tight Sealing Pad>
Screw 6 Press the square hole area of the
connecting chamber 2 ( 3 ) into the (1) (2) (3) (4)
Outside air inlet hook section of suction chamber 1 .
7 Flexible duct
(2 positions each)
Suction chamber 1 Split pin wrong correct
(Procedure 2)
Using the supplied screws 6 , fix the
connecting chamber. (2 positions each)
(1) Wrap the sealing pad (2) Insert the tip of the (3) Using a standard (4) This completes
Figure 7 Mounting of connecting chamber to the position to be band through the tool (driver, pliers, the mounting.
(This figure shows the connecting chamber (left) 2 .) tightened. gap of the split pin, etc.), turn the split
then lightly tighten pin to the direction
by hand. shown in the figure
to tighten the band.
Precautions
Because the split pin has a structure to prevent counter rotation, be careful with the
turning direction. (When a counter rotation is forced, the ratchet will be damaged, and
Drawing of mounting
the tightening force will be weakened.)
at completion
In case of KDDP55K160K
(3) Connect the connecting chamber and T joint. Figure 8 (4) Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit by using screws to
Flexible duct 11 cure the indoor unit.
Connecting chamber (right) 3 (Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit main body.)
T joint 10 (Refer to the figure below.)
Hanging band for duct Installation pattern paper
(Mounting of installation
Duct (field supplied) (field supplied) (Supplied with the indoor unit
pattern paper) main body)
(φ150)
Screw
Sealing pad 12 (Supplied with the indoor unit
Connecting chamber (left) 2 To prevent applying weight to the main body)
connecting chamber, hang the T
Insert the flexible duct joint using the hanging band for • Complete all the refrigerant and drain piping works for the indoor unit main body.
until the base of the the duct.
Figure 8 connecting chamber.
Duct Connection <<Duct: Nominal diameter φ150>>
(1) Connect the duct to the duct connection area. a) Extreme bending b) Multiple bending c) Reduction of connecting duct diameter
(2) Wrap the connection area with vinyl tape, etc., (arrangement at site) to prevent an air leak.
Precautions
• For the duct, be sure to apply the insulation treatment to prevent condensation.
• Do not perform duct manipulations described in the figure to the right.
• Beware that, in accordance with the local law, there may be cases where the use of a nonflammable duct is
compulsory.
• When a duct goes through fire protection areas including a fire proof structure, beware that, in accordance with the local law, it may be required to establish a damper or to build a
structure that is not detrimental to fire protection.
• When penetrating a wooden construction wall with a metal duct, apply electrical insulation to the duct and wall.
• Mount the outside duct so that it has a downslope toward the outside, and prevent rainwater from leaking in with a hood, etc. (Gradient of 1/100 to 1/50)
• To prevent the intrusion of small animals, such as birds, and bugs, be sure to attach a netting to sections open to outside air.
• To protect the heat exchanger of the indoor unit, be sure to attach an air filter to sections open to outside air.
Mounting of Decoration Panel
• After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wiring hole of the suction chamber.
However, when used in combination with the air purifier unit or streamer deodorization unit, perform wiring without routing through the wiring hole.
• Mount the decoration panel according to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
Suction chamber 1
Wiring hole
Swing motor lead wire: Route from the panel side to the
suction chamber 1 .
With wireless unit
(After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass • For details on connection method, refer to the installation manual
through the wiring hole.) attached to the wireless remote control kit (sold separately).
With an air purifier unit or

streamer deodorization unit Decoration panel
JC : 3K017588D

FCQ EDHK281006
KDDP55K160 (without T joint, without fan)
KDDP55K160K (with T joint, without fan)

EDHK281006 FCQ
3.5 KDDP55X160 — Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type)

KDDP55X160 Model
KDDP55X160
Item
Material Hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet
Insulation material retainer plate : 1
Insulation material : 1 set
Accessories
Mounting screws : 4
Dimensions Unit:mm
3
124 67
6
φ12
φ 137
φ 98
4− φ 5 Hole (cyclotomic)
J : D3K04240A

FCQ EDHK281006
Installation
Precautions This kit can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner.
When using this kit, a duct (nominal diameter: φ100) is required separately.
• Beware that, in accordance with the local law, there may be cases where the use of a nonflammable duct is compulsory.
• When a duct goes through fire protection areas including a fire proof structure, beware that, in accordance with the local law,
it may be required to establish a damper or to build a structure that is not detrimental to fire protection.
• When penetrating a wooden construction wall with a metal duct, apply electrical insulation to the duct and wall.
• Mount the outside duct so that it has a downslope toward the outside, and prevent rainwater from leaking in.
(Gradient of 1/100 to 1/50)
• To prevent the intrusion of small animals, such as birds, and bugs, be sure to attach a netting to sections open to
outside air.

Name 1 Duct flange 2 Mounting screws 3 Duct flange insulator 4 Main body opening insulator 5 Sealing pad retainer 6 Installation manual
Number of pieces 1 4 1 1 1 1
Shape
M4×12
Tools needed for mounting Phillips-type screwdriver, nippers, and cutter, etc.
Mounting of Duct Flange
1) Cut off the side plate of the indoor unit main body along the dowel hole without damaging
the internal insulator. Figure 1
Piping position
Internal insulator Drain pipe position
Cut off using

Side plate nippers, etc.
Slit Side plate

Figure 1
2) Stick the main body's opening insulator 4 to the opening. Figure 2
Figure 2
Main body opening insulator 4
JC : 2P137676B

EDHK281006 FCQ
3) After mounting the duct flange 1 to the opening using the mounting screws 2 (M4×12, 4 pieces),
stick the duct flange insulator 3 . Figure 3
Duct flange 1
Mounting screws 2
(M4×12, 4 pieces)
Duct flange insulator 3 Figure 3
4) Before mounting the decoration panel, remove the insulator, and stick the sealing pad retainer 5 to
the indoor unit drain pan. Figure 4
Figure 4
Sealing pad retainer 5

Insulator Be careful not to
block the air outlet.
Duct Connection 〈〈Duct: Nominal diameter φ100〉〉
1) Connect the duct to the outside of the duct flange. Figure 5

2) After the connection, wrap the connection area with tape (field supplied) to prevent an air leak.
Wrap with tape to prevent an air leak.
Duct flange 1
Figure 5
Tape
φ100 duct (field supplied)
Precautions a) Extreme bending b) Multiple bending c) Reduction of connecting

duct diameter
Perform insulation for all ducts.
Do not perform duct manipulations
shown to the right.
J : 2P137676B

FCQ EDHK281006

— High Efficiency Filter (Including Chamber)
KAFP556H80 / KAFP556H160 Dimensions Unit:mm
KAFP557H80 / KAFP557H160
50 (dimensions when mounted)
842
842
J : D3K04253
Caution Model
KAFP556H80 KAFP556H160 KAFP557H80 KAFP557H160
· Field setting by remote controller is necessary Item
when the high efficiency filter is installed. Material Galvanized sheet iron.
Foam polystyrene.
Initial
pressure loss Pa 34 or less
Final pressure Pa 98 or less

loss
Average % 65 (colorimetric method) 90 (colorimetric method)
efficiency
m3/min 19 35 19 35
Air flow rate
l/sec 317 583 317 583
Life h 2,500 1,800

(dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3) (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Filter element Non-woven fabric of synthetic fiber
Number of sheets 1 1 1 1
included
Accessories
Sealing material : 2
Mass (Weight) kg 3.6 4.2 3.6 4.2
Replacement filter
(optional KAFP552H80 KAFP552H160 KAFP553H80 KAFP553H160
accessories)

EDHK281006 FCQ
Installation
Recommendations
• This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner
• For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must always <round flow >.
be used. • According to the table below, check the model name of the indoor unit main body,
If the specified components are not used, the kit may fall or an air leak may occur. then mount the product.
• After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no abnormality • At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit and to
is present. the installation manual of the decoration panel.

Combination table
Name High efficiency filter unit Sealing pad Installation manual
Model name Installable indoor unit model name / Panel model name
KAFP556H80 FCQ(N)71KVEA
SkyAir
KAFP557H80 FCQ71KVLT
Shape
3
KAFP556H160 FCQ(N)100K / 125K / 140KVEA
SkyAir
KAFP557H160 FCQ100K / 125K / 140KVLT
Number of pieces 1 2 1 (This document)
Panel BYCP125K-W1
Mounting of High Efficiency Filter Unit
* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with Figure 1
precautions below.
Shut off power supply before performing the operation. High efficiency filter
Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit's main body.
(For details, refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.) Filter clasp
* When the indoor unit main body is newly installed Rotate the filter clasp by 90°
to remove the filter
(1) Remove the high efficiency filter from the chamber. Figure 1 (4 positions)
(2) Mount the high efficiency filter unit to the indoor unit main body using the hooks
(4 positions). Figure 2 to Figure 4
For the fixing method of the hooks, refer to the figure to the right. Mount at 4 positions.
Hook
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and chamber match. Figure 3 Figure 5
Suspension bracket
Figure 2
Fixing method of hooks
High efficiency filter
unit
Figure 3 Mounting status
Figure 4 Status after mounting
High efficiency filter unit
Hook Hook
Indoor unit main body (4 positions)
Match the contour.
Control box cover

Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Refrigerant piping
Figure 5 Drawing of mounting at
completion
High efficiency filter unit
JC : 3K015220F

FCQ EDHK281006
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and High Efficiency Filter Unit
• Install the indoor unit main body and high efficiency filter unit.
At the time of installation, perform engineering work according to the installation manual attached
to the air conditioner's main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure to the right.) Suspension bracket
• When mounting the high efficiency filter unit to the existing indoor unit main body, change the
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height in the figure to the right. Indoor unit
main body
(Installation height
guideline)
• Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit using screws to
cure the indoor unit.
(Refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit main body.)
(Refer to the figure below.) High efficiency filter unit
Ceiling surface
(mm)
Installation pattern paper
(Supplied with indoor unit main body)
BYCP125K-W1 185
M4×12 Screws
[Mounting of installation pattern paper]
• Complete all the refrigerant and drain piping work for the indoor unit main body.
Mounting of Decoration Panel and Mounting of High Efficiency Filter
• After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wire through hole of
the high efficiency filter unit.
Sealing pad (supplied): For preventing air bypass

High efficiency Figure 6 (Stick to 2 positions in the same manner.)
filter chamber
Wire through hole
Swing motor lead wire:

Route from the panel side to
the high efficiency filter chamber. Decoration panel
(After temporarily hooking High efficiency

the decoration panel, filter unit
pass through the wire through hole.)
Decoration panel
Rotate the filter clasp by 90˚ to
• Mounting of high efficiency filter fix the filter.
After the completion of wiring and sticking of sealing pad (2 positions), mount the high efficiency (4 positions)
filter. Figure 6 Figure 7
Filter clasp
With wireless unit Figure 7 High efficiency filter
• Route the connector of the receiver lead wire through the wire through hole, then connect the connector on the indoor PC board ass'y.
• For details on the connection method, refer to the installation manual attached to the wireless remote control kit (sold separately).
Preparation of Indoor Unit
• With the mounting of a high efficiency filter unit, setting the indoor unit main Mode number Setting switch number Setting position number Remarks
body is required.
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch to the setting 0 02 80 only
position number as shown in the table to the right. 13 or 23
1 02 Both 80 and 160
For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field setting" attached to
the remote control.
JC : 3K015220F

EDHK281006 FCQ

— Replacement High Efficiency Filter
KAFP552H80 / KAFP552H160 Dimensions Unit:mm
KAFP553H80 / KAFP553H160
Model A
560 KAFP552H80 · KAFP553H80 25
KAFP552H160 · KAFP553H160 45
560
3
0
10 540 -2 10
A
D3K04256A
Caution Model
KAFP552H80 KAFP552H160 KAFP553H80 KAFP553H160
· Cannot be water-washed for reuse. Item
· The filter chamber (KDDFP55H160) is required Initial Pa 34 or less
pressure loss
when the high efficiency filter will be installed.
loss
Average
efficiency % 65 (colorimetric method) 90 (colorimetric method)
m3/min 19 35 19 35
Air flow rate
l/sec 317 583 317 583
Life h 2,500 (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3) 1,800 (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Number of sheets 1 1 1 1
included
Mass (Weight) kg 0.6 1.2 0.6 1.2

FCQ EDHK281006
3.8 KDDFP55H160 — High Efficiency Filter Chamber

KDDFP55H160 Dimensions Unit:mm
50 (dimensions when attached)

842
842
J : D3K04252
Model
KDDFP55H160
Item
High efficiency 65% (colorimetric method) KAFP552H80 KAFP552H160
Inserted filter
filter 90% (colorimetric method) KAFP553H80 KAFP553H160
Ultra long-life filter KAFP55H160H
Galvanized sheet iron.
Material Foam polystyrene.
Installation manual
Accessories Sealing pad : 2

EDHK281006 FCQ
Installation
Recommendations
Caution After thoroughly reading these "Safety Precautions", properly perform the installation.
• This product can be mounted to ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner
• For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must <round flow>.
always be used.
• According to the table below, check the model name of the indoor unit main body, then
If the specified components are not used, the kit may fall or an air leak may occur.
• After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no mount the product.
abnormality is present. • At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and to
the one for the decoration panel.
Recommendations (When using ultra-long life filter)
Combination table
The ultra-long life filter can be reused after cleaning.
Model name High efficiency filter Ultra-long life filter Installable indoor unit model name / Panel model name
After engineering work is completed, provide instructions to the customer about
the filter cleaning interval and how to remove the filter. KAFP552H80 FCQ(N)71KVEA
Or SkyAir
Parts content Check the following parts. KAFP553H80 FCQ71KVLT
Name Filter chamber Sealing pad Installation manual KAFP55H160H

KDDFP KAFP552H160
55H160 Or
KAFP553H160
SkyAir
FCQ(N)100K / 125K / 140KVEA
FCQ100K / 125K / 140KVLT
3
Shape Panel BYCP125K-W1
Mounting of Filter Chamber
* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with
precautions below.
Shut off power supply before performing the operation. Hook
Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit main body.
* When the indoor unit main body is newly installed
(1) Mount the filter chamber to the indoor unit main body using the hooks (4 positions).
Suspension bracket
Figure 1 to Figure 3
Fixing method of hooks
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and chamber are match. Figure 2 Figure 4
Figure 1 Figure 2 Mounting status Figure 3 Status after mounting

Filter chamber
Filter chamber
Hook
Hook
Match the contour
Suspension bracket
Lead wire
Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Refrigerant piping
Drawing of mounting at
Figure 4
completion
Filter chamber
JC : 3K015219F

FCQ EDHK281006
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and Filter Chamber
• Install the indoor unit main body and filter chamber.

At the time of installation, perform engineering work according to the installation manual
attached to the air conditioner's main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure to
the right.)
Suspension bracket
• When mounting the filter chamber to the existing indoor unit main body, change the
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height in the figure to the right.
Indoor unit
• Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit using screws main body
to cure the indoor unit. (Installation height
(Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit main body.) guideline)
(Refer to the figure below.)
Installation pattern paper Filter chamber

Ceiling surface
(mm)
BYCP125K-W1 185
M4 × 12 screws
Mounting of Decoration Panel and Mounting of Filter Chamber
• After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wire through hole of the filter chamber.
Figure 5 (Stick to 2 positions in the same manner.)
Filter chamber
Wire through hole
Decoration panel

Route from the panel side to the Filter chamber
filter chamber.
(After temporarily hooking the
decoration panel, pass through
the wire through hole.) Rotate the filter clasp by 90˚
to fix the filter.
(2 positions)
Decoration panel
Filter clasp
• Mounting of filter
After the completion of wiring and sticking of sealing pad (2 positions), mount the filter.
Figure 5 Figure 6
Before mounting each filter to the chamber,
cut off at the perforation (2 positions).
Filters
With wireless unit Figure 6
• Route the connector of the receiver lead wire through the wire through hole, then connect the connector on the indoor PC board assembly.
• Depending on the types of mounting filters, setting the Filter name Mode number Setting switch number Setting position number Filter sign display interval time
indoor unit main body is may be required. High 80 only 0 02
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch performance 13 or 23
Both 80 and 160 1 02
to the setting position number shown in the table to the right. filter
For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field Where there is minimal fouling
01 Approximately every 10,000 hours
setting" attached to the remote control. (Example: Office, etc.)
0
Ultra-long life filter 10 or 20 Where there is considerable fouling
(Example: Pachinko parlor, etc.)
1 02 Initial setting for ultra-long life filter
JC : 3K015219F

EDHK281006 FCQ
3.9 KAFP551K160 — Replacement Long-life Filter

KAFP551K160 Model
KAFP551K160
Item
Initial pressure loss Pa 4.9 or less
Final pressure loss Pa 49 or less
Average efficiency % 60 (gravity method)
m3/min 18
Air flow rate
l/sec 300
Life h 5,000 (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Filter element Mould-proof and antibacterial resin net
Number of sheets included 1
3
Caution
· Can be water-washed. Can be reused.
Dimensions Unit:mm
535.5 2310
9
6 3.5
552.5
492.5
>PS<
6 3.5
9
Square hole (both sides)
J : D3K05114

FCQ EDHK281006
3.10 KAFP55H160 — Ultra Long-life Filter Unit (Including Chamber)

KAFP55H160 Dimensions Unit:mm
50 (dimensions when attached)

842
12
842
J : D3K04254
Caution Model
KAFP55H160
· In order to mount a ultra long life filter unit, Item
setting of the main unit of indoor unit should Material Galvanized steel iron.
Foam polystyrene.
be made.
Initial pressure loss Pa 8 or less
· Individual filter (KAFP55H160H) is available Final pressure loss Pa 49 or less
as an optional accessory. Average efficiency % 50 (gravity method)
m3/min 29.5
Air flow rate
l/sec 492
Mounting locations Filter cleaning period Life h 5,000 (dust concentration 0.3 mg/m3)
Filter element Polypropylene honeycomb (with mould-proof)
Locations with much Approximately every
dust 5,000 hours Number of sheets included 1
Locations with little dust Approximately every Accessories Installation manual.
(e.g. offices) 10,000 hours Sealing pad : 2

EDHK281006 FCQ
Installation
Recommendations
• This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner
• For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must <Round flow>.
always be used. • According to the table below, check the model name of the indoor unit main body, then
If the specified components are not used, the kit may fall or an air leak may occur. mount the product.
• After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no • At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and to
abnormality is present. the one for the decoration panel.
Recommendations
The ultra-long life filter can be reused after cleaning.
Combination table
After the engineering works are completed, provide instructions to the customer
about the filter cleaning interval and how to remove the filter. Model name Installable indoor unit model name / Panel model name
Name Ultra-long life filter unit Sealing pad Installation manual FCQ(N)71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA
KAFP55H160 SkyAir
FCQ71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVLT
3
Shape
Panel BYCP125K-W1
Mounting of Ultra-Long Life Filter Unit
* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with Figure 1
precautions below.
Shut off power supply before performing the operation. Ultra-long life filter
Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit main body.
Filter clasp
* When the indoor unit main body is newly installed
Rotate the filter clasp by
90˚ to remove the filter
(1) Remove the ultra-long life filter from the chamber. Figure 1 (4 positions)
(2) Mount the ultra-long life filter unit to the indoor unit main body using the hooks (4 positions).
Figure 2 to Figure 4
Hook
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and chamber match. Figure 3 Figure 5
Suspension bracket
Figure 2 Fixing method of hooks
Ultra-long life filter unit Figure 3 Mounting status
Figure 4 Status after mounting

Ultra-long life filter unit
Hook Hook
Match the contour.

Control box cover
Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Refrigerant piping
Figure 5 : Drawing of mounting at completion
Ultra-long life filter unit
JC : 3K015221E

FCQ EDHK281006
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and Ultra-Long Life Filter Unit
• Install the indoor unit main body and ultra-long life filter unit.
At the time of installation, perform engineering work according to the installation manual
attached to the air conditioner's main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure to Suspension bracket
the right.)
• When mounting the ultra-long life filter unit to the existing indoor unit main body, change the Indoor unit
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height in the figure to the right. main body
(Installation height
guideline)
• Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit by using screws
to cure the indoor unit.
(Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit main body.) Ultra-long life filter unit
Ceiling surface
(Refer to the figure below.)
(mm)
Installation pattern paper

BYCP125K-W1 185
M4 × 12 Screw
Mounting of Decoration Panel and Mounting of Ultra-Long Life Filter
• After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wire through hole of the ultra-long
life filter unit.

Figure 6 (Stick to 2 positions in the same manner.)
Ultra-long life filter chamber
Wire through hole

Decoration panel
Route from the panel side to the
ultra-long life filter chamber.
(After temporarily hooking the
decoration panel, pass through
the wire through hole.) Ultra-long life filter unit
Decoration panel Rotate the filter clasp by 90˚

to fix the filter.
• Mounting of ultra-long life filter (4 positions)
After the completion of wiring and sticking of sealing pad (2 positions), mount the
ultra-long life filter. Figure 6 Figure 7 Filter clasp
Figure 7 Ultra-long life filter

With wireless unit
• Route the connector of the receiver lead wire through the wire through hole, then connect the connector on the indoor printed circuit board assembly.
• With the mounting of a ultra-long life filter unit, setting the indoor unit main Mode number Setting switch number Setting position Number Filter sign display interval time
body is required.
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch to the setting Where there is minimal fouling
position number shown in the table to the right. (Example: Office, etc.)
0
For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field setting" attached 10 or 20 Where there is considerable fouling
to the remote control. 02 Approximately every 5,000 hours
(Example: Pachinko parlor, etc.)
1 02 Initial setting for ultra-long life filter
JC : 3K015221E

EDHK281006 FCQ
3.11 KAFP55H160H — Replacement Ultra Long-life Filter

KAFP55H160H Dimensions Unit:mm
10
536-20
10
3
12
10 10
12 536 -20 12
60
12.5
J : D3K04257
Caution Model
KAFP55H160H
· Can be water-washed. Can be reused. Item
· The filter chamber (KDDFP55H160) is Initial pressure loss Pa 8 or less
required when the ultra long life filter will be Final pressure loss Pa 49 or less
installed. Average efficiency % 50 (gravity method)

m3/min 29.5
Air flow rate
l/sec 492
Filter element Mould-proof resin net
Number of sheets included 1

FCQ EDHK281006
3.12 KKSJ55K160 — Chamber Connection Kit

KKSJ55K160 Dimensions Unit:mm
Vinyl tube
J : D3K2186
Installation
, F H (Y) C ~ K V E
FHC~NUV1, FHC~NUV2S, ~KV2S
C : 3P089651D

EDHK281006 FCQ
3.13 KDJP55H80 / KDJP55H160 — Branch Duct Chamber

KDJP55H80 / KDJP55H160 Model
KDJP55H80 KDJP55H160
Item

(with insulation)
Mounting screws : 10
Blocking pad : 2
Tape for fixing the blocking pad : 2
Accessories
Opening sealing material : 1 set
Insulation material : 1 set
3
Caution
1. When mounting, refer to the installation manuals for the indoor unit and the
decoration panel.
Dimensions Unit:mm
KDJP55H80 KDJP55H160
208 256
382
366 232
382
200 177
366 232
200 176
106
77
179
167
φ206
φ198
240
121
109
φ156
φ148
11
190
15
6-6 × 10 6-6 × 10
oblong holes oblong holes
4-φ6 holes 4-φ6 holes
J : D3K04231 J : D3K04232

FCQ EDHK281006
Installation
Precautions Combination table

• This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner <round flow>. Model name Installable indoor unit model name
According to the table to the right, check the model name of the indoor unit, then mount the product.
• At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit main body and to the
one for the decoration panel.
FCQ(N)71KVEA
• For the duct (field supplied) to be connected, those specified in the table to the right are recommended. KDJP55H80 SkyAir
FCQ71KVLT
Name Branch duct chamber Mounting screw Installation manual Sealing material Tape for fixing the sealing material
FCQ(N)100K/125K/140KVEA
KDJP55H160 SkyAir
Shape/ FCQ100K/125K/140KVLT
Number
M4×16
Number 80
of pieces 160 1 10 1 2 2
Name Main body insulator Main body opening sealant Recommended duct
1 2 3 4 5A 5B
Branch duct chamber Connecting duct kit name
Shape/
Number KDJP55H80 K-FDK151B (1 m) or K-FDK152B (2 m) (Flexible duct: Nominal diameter of φ150)
(Small) (Large)
Number 80 2 ——
KDJP55H160 K-FDK201B (1 m) or K-FDK202B (2 m) (Flexible duct: Nominal diameter of φ200)
of pieces 160 1 1 2 2
1 1
Preparation Before Installation With this branch duct, an independent 4-way and simultaneous 2-branch drawing are also possible.
• With this branch duct chamber, the blow directions shown in the
1-way branching, main body 3-direction blow Branch
figure to the right can be selected.
Select the blow direction that is most appropriate for the room Closed Closed
shape and installation position. (Blow directions other than those Closed Drain side
Branch
in the figure to the right cannot be selected.)
• From the external static pressure/air volume characteristics (refer
to the technical guide), select the duct length and air outlet.
Precautions Branch
Piping side Closed
• Be sure to securely block the air outlet of the indoor unit main
body to which the branch duct chamber is mounted. If the Branch
blocking is incomplete, water spraying or condensation may
occur. Do not block the corner sections. 1-way branching, main body 2-direction blow
(Refer to Mounting of Sealing Material to Indoor Unit .) Closed Closed Closed
• When mounting the branch duct chamber, be sure to perform field
setting of the indoor unit main body.
(Refer to Field Setting .)
Branching to
Branching to Closed either side
either side
2-way branching, main body 2-direction blow Another branch duct chamber set is necessary.
Closed Closed Closed
Closed Branch
Branch
Mounting of Branch Duct Chamber
When an installation is performed after mounting the branch duct chamber to the indoor unit main body Face 3
(at new installation), do not apply force to the branch duct chamber. (Deformation may occur.) Face 4 Face 2
(1) Select the position where the branch duct chamber is mounted.
(2) Mount the branch duct chamber to the indoor unit according to the following procedure. ( Figure 2 is an Face 3 Face 2
example of the face 1 side.)
1) Along the slit, cut the side plate of the indoor unit to which the branch duct chamber is mounted. Then,
cut the internal insulator along the groove. Figure 1
(Use nippers, etc., to cut the slit section, and cutter, etc., to cut the groove section.) Figure 2 Face 1
Internal insulator
For the port opening operation, do not use a tool that produces chips, such as a saw. The drain system may become clogged, and a water
leak may occur. Side plate
2) Use the sealant for sticking so that the gaps between the side plate and internal insulator are filled around the full circumference. Figure 3
• First, stick the main body's opening sealant 4 to left and right of the opening, and the main body's opening sealant 5A ( 5B ) to the upper and lower sides of Face 4
the opening.
At this time, fold the main body opening sealant towards the inside so that the gap between the side plate and internal insulator is no longer visible. Figure 2 Face 1
Main body opening sealant Main body opening sealant 4 Side plate slit (Internal insulator groove)
5A ( 5B )
( )
Stick without leaving
Internal
any gap against the main insulator Side plate Opening
(Top plate side)
body's opening sealant
Main body opening sealant 5A ( 5B )
Main body opening sealant 4 5A ( 5B ).
Internal
insulator
Stick so that the gap between
( )
Stick without leaving the side plate and internal
any gap against the main insulator are filled around the
body's opening sealant Main body opening sealant 5A Figure 3 Sectional View full circumference.
5A ( 5B ).
JC : 1P137894D

EDHK281006 FCQ
3) Mount the branch duct chamber. Figure 4

Indoor unit Mount so that the flat face becomes
the top plate side of the indoor unit.
Branch duct chamber
Mounting screw, 10 pieces

(M4×16)
Figure 4
(3) Stick the main body insulator to the indoor unit. (The figure is an example of the face 1 side) Figure 5
Main body insulator 1
Stick with the end folded.
Stick with the left sides of
the main body insulators Main body insulator 2
1 , 2 , and 3 aligned.
Create a slit to the wiring hole using a cutter, etc..
Be sure to stick the main body insulator from the top of the branch duct
chamber flange (sheet metal section). Otherwise, condensation may occur. Figure 5
3
KDJP55H80 ... Nominal diameter of φ150
Duct Connection <<Duct: KDJP55H160 ... Nominal diameter of φ200>>
1) Connect the duct to the outside of the branch duct chamber. Figure 6 Tape Wrap with tape to prevent
• After the connection, wrap the connection area with tape (field supplied) Branch duct chamber an air leak.
to prevent an air leak.
• Apply insulation for all the ducts.
main body
Indoor unit
2) Do not perform duct manipulation described below.
a) Extreme bending b) Multiple bending c) Reduction of connecting
duct diameter Duct of φ150 or φ200
(field supplied)
Figure 6
1. Beware that, in accordance with the local law, there may be cases where the use of a nonflammable duct is compulsory.
2. When a duct goes through fire protection areas, including a fire proof structure, beware that, in accordance with the local law, it may
be required to establish a damper or to build a structure that is not detrimental to fire protection.
3. When penetrating a wooden construction wall with a metal duct, apply electrical insulation to the duct and wall.
Mounting of Sealing Material to Indoor Unit <<With the sealing material supplied in this kit, blocking of two openings can be performed.>>
• For the block position, refer to Preparation Before Installation , then determine the position. Always block the branch duct mounting surface.
Closed 3 3 3 3
Air outlet 2
Air outlet 3 Closed
Closed
3-way blow 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
Closed
1 1 1 1
3 Closed 3
Drain side
Closed Closed
Air outlet 1 Air outlet 3 2-way blow 2 4 2 4
Closed
Piping side 1 1
(1) Matching the longitudinal air outlets numbered from 1 to 4 to be blocked, prepare the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material. (2) Stick the sealing material that was prepared in (1) to
• Cut both the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material along the perforation (dotted line). the air outlet of the indoor unit main body.
• Stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material.
(Stick so that the sealing material is at the centre of the tape for fixing the sealing material.) Indoor unit main body
Example) When blocking air outlet 2 or 3
Sealing material
<Sealing material preparation>
2
4 · Procedure 1
Procedure 2 3
Remove the Cut off.
release paper.
3 Precautions
Procedure 3 The sealing material has a directional
Stick the sealing material so that property. Be sure to stick the sealing
Release paper it is at the centre of the tape for material to the tape for fixing the sealing Air outlet 1
Tape for fixing the sealing material
fixing the sealing material. material so that the printed number of the
outlet to be blocked becomes visible. <Mounting to air outlet>
∗ When blocking the air outlet 1 , sealing material preparation is not necessary.
For safety, be sure to shut off power supply before starting the decoration
Mounting of Decoration Panel panel mounting operation and connecting the connectors for swinging.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.

After mounting the decoration panel, check that no gap is present between the decoration panel and the unit's main body.
Field Setting
• When mounting the branch duct chamber, setting the indoor unit main body is required. Branch blow pattern Mode number Setting switch number Setting position number
After all the engineering work is completed, perform setting together with field setting of 1-way branching,
3-direction blow 02
the indoor unit.
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch to the setting position number 1-way branching and 2-way blow 13 or 23 1
shown in the table to the right. For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field or 03
setting" attached to the remote control. 2-way branching and 2-way blow
JC : 1P137894D

FCQ EDHK281006
3.14 KDTP55K80 / KDTP55K160 — Insulation Kit for High Humidity

KDTP55K80 Dimensions Unit:mm
Model AA AB
KDTP55K80 245 157
KDTP55K160 287 186
Top panel insulation (1) (t10) ×1 Side panel insulation (1) (t10) ×1
862
778±1
slit
144
AA
Top panel insulation (2) (t10) ×1
862
slit
Side panel insulation (2) (t10) ×1

765±1
574
AA
AB
perforation
Top panel insulation (3) (t10) ×1 Side panel insulation (3) (t10) ×1
862 769±1
slit
144
AA
slit
Insulation for decoration panel (t5) ×4 Side panel insulation (4) (t10) ×1
900 772±1
AA
34
2-hole
J : D3K05113
Model
KDTP55K80 KDTP55K160
Item
Polyethylene foam
Material (with adhesive on the reverse side)
Applicable ambient temperature 40°CDB, RH85%
Insulation for hanger bracket : 4
Accessories Installation manual.

EDHK281006 FCQ
Installation
Precautions
This kit can be mounted to an ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner <round flow>.
According to the chart below, check the model name of indoor unit, then mount the kit.
This kit cannot be used for the mounting of humidifier and branch duct.
Combination table
Model name Installable indoor unit model name
FCQ(N)71KVEA
KDTP55K80 SkyAir
FCQ71KVLT
FCQ(N)100K / 125K / 140KVEA

KDTP55K160 SkyAir
FCQ100K / 125K / 140KVLT
Parts content 3
Name 1 Side insulator plate (1) 2 Side insulator plate (2) 3 Side insulator plate (3) 4 Side insulator plate (4) 5 Top insulator plate (1)
778mm 80 A=245mm 765mm 80 A=245mm 769mm 80 A=245mm 772mm 80 A=245mm
160 A=287mm 160 A=287mm 160 A=287mm 160 A=287mm
Shape
A
A
Slit Slit
Number of pieces 1 1 1 1 1
Name 6 Top insulator plate (2) 7 Top insulator plate (3) 8 suspension bracket insulator 9 Panel insulator Others
Shape
· This manual
Number of pieces 1 1 4 4
Sticking Procedure Perform the work on soft cloth to prevent damage to the indoor unit and panel.
<Procedure>
(1) According to the sticking procedure for the side insulator plate, stick the side insulator plates (1 to 4) in sequential 6 Top insulator plate (2) 5 Top insulator plate (1)
order without leaving any gap in between. (Figure 1)
(When mounting the fresh air intake kit (KDDP55X160), cut off the side insulator plate (2) with a knife along the
perforation. The cut-off insulator is no longer needed.)
(2) Stick the top insulator plates (1 to 3) without leaving any gap in between. Also, stick the top insulator plates without
leaving any gap against the side insulator plates all the way around. (Figure 2)
(3) Hang the product.
(4) Stick the suspension bracket insulator to the suspension bracket together with the washer and bolt. (Figure 3)
(5) Lastly, stick the panel insulator to the backside of the panel. (Figure 4)
2 Side insulator plate (2) 7 Top insulator plate (3)

3 Side insulator plate (3) Slit
* Fresh air intake kit

When mounting (KDDP55X160), cut off
the insulator along the perforation.
Slit
(Figure 2)
Perforation
Suspension bracket
(4 points)
8 Suspension bracket insulator

4 Side insulator plate (4)
Slit 1 Side insulator plate (1)
Sticking reference for
2 side insulator plate (2)
side insulator plate (3) Suspension bracket (Figure 3)
(4 points)
9 Panel insulator
At the suspension bracket section, At the suspension bracket section, * After hanging the product, stick the
the slit must be passed through. the slit must be passed through. suspension bracket insulator.
Match these corners

1 before sticking.
3
side insulator plate (1)
side insulator plate (4)
4
Sticking procedure for side insulator plate Panel insulator
(Figure 4)
(Figure 1)
JC : 3P179341C

FCQ EDHK281006
3.15 KRP1H98 — Installation Box for Adaptor PCB

Model
KRP1H98
Item
Adaptor for wiring KRP1C63

KRP4AA53
Clamp : 2
Code sticker : 6
Screws for adaptor box cover : 1
Wire clamp material : 8
Mounting screws : 3
Earth wire (length 1060m) : 1
Dimensions Unit:mm
Adaptor box Adaptor box cover
hole
hole
hole
Fixture
hole hole
hole
hole
hole
J : D3K04202

EDHK281006 FCQ
Installation
2P196605A

FCQ EDHK281006
2P196605A

EDHK281006 FCQ
2P196606A

FCQ EDHK281006
2P196606A

EDHK281006 FCQ
3.16 KRCS01-4B — Remote Sensor (for Indoor Temperature)

Model
KRCS01-1B KRCS01-4B
Item
Length of branch wiring m 12
Appearance Light ivory (with the Daikin logo)
Box material ABS resin
Dimensions mm W50 × H60 × D15
Remote sensor.
Extension cord (12m).
Component parts Screws: 2
Clamps: 2
3
· Recommended for ceiling suspension and Caution
ceiling-embedded types which often result in a · Select a location for the sensor where it can detect the average temperature.
difference between set temperature and actual Avoid the following locations.
temperature. 1. Locations in direct sunlight.
· The sensor for detecting the temperature can 2. Locations where the outlet air from the air conditioner is directed.
be placed away from the indoor air conditioner. 3. Locations close to other heat sources.
(Branch wiring is included in the kit.) 4. Locations near doors which might be affected by air coming in.

FCQ EDHK281006
Installation
3K019189B

EDHK281006 FCQ
3K019189B

FCQ EDHK281006
3K019189B

EDHK281006 FHQ
4. FHQ
4.1 KDU50N125VE — Drain-up Kit
KDU50N60VE Model
KDU50N125VE KDU50N60VE KDU50N125VE
Item
Drain-up lift mm 600
Drain Con. diameter VP20 (Ex. dia. φ 26, Int. dia. φ 20)
Single phase 220-240V/220V 50/60Hz
Power supply (from Indoor Unit PCB)
Pump
Power consumption W 13.5/12 (50/60Hz)
Dimensions Unit:mm
Float switch transmission wiring Float switch

Drain outlet
Drain pump
(VP20)
Drain pump
transmission
115
wiring
167
140
149
34 173
227
J : D3K03613A

FHQ EDHK281006
Installation
SkyAir FHQ35·50·60BVVIB
SkyAir FHQ71·100·125BVVIB
C : 3K012642A

EDHK281006 FHQ
1 Preparations before hanging the indoor unit

The drain up kit is installed after the air conditioner main unit is hung. Preparations are required before hanging the air conditioner. At least 60 mm
(Installation service space)
Mounting space
Select the place for the indoor unit to be installed in consideration of the installation service space.
Note, however, that there must be at least 60 mm of service space to the right of the indoor unit main unit.
See the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for the service space for the indoor unit. Figure 2
Figure 2
(1) Select the position of the pipe outtake, the drain pipe outtake, and the wiring outtake, A (Dimension of the main unit)
and make holes in those positions. B (Hanging pitch)
The locations are displayed on the installation pattern paper attached to the indoor unit, C
so use the paper pattern. Figure 3 D
(2) Perform the refrigerant and drain piping work following the installation manual attached
160
185
85
E
to the indoor unit.
Field drain piping should be as short as possible and with a downward slope (1/25 – 1/100)
680 (Dimension of the main unit)
210
to prevent air pockets. Figure 4
Be sure to insulate all drainpipes which run above the ceiling.
3
(Hanging pitch)
260
(Seen from above) Position for connecting
upward drain hose
Be sure to fix the field drain pipe to the support brackets in the ceiling. Figure 4 Position for connecting
upward gas pipe
(3) Connect the attached piping 6 and the field refrigerant piping. Position for connecting
upward liquid pipe
For the attached pipes 6 , select the liquid and gas pipes which match the pipe diameters
Eyebolt
of the corresponding indoor unit. (4)
Outlet
When connecting the flare nuts, refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
(4) Wrap the insulation pipe cover attached to the indoor unit and fasten with the clamp material 5 . Model (FHQ~) A B C D E
(For both gas and liquid pipes.) Figure 5 35·50 type 960 920 390 375 310
(5) Be sure to use adhesive when connecting the attached drain hose 2 and the field drain piping 60·71 type 1160 1120 490 475 410
in the ceiling. Figure 4 100 type 1400 1360 610 595 530
(6) Insulate the drain hose using the attached insulation pipe cover(large) 7 . Figure 6 125 type 1590 1550 800 785 720
Figure 3
Ceiling slab
1~1.5m Field refrigerant piping

Insulating material Support bracket Wrap with vinyl tape to prevent
(Field supplied)
air from entering through split.
Anti-condensation tubing 7 Insulation pipe cover
(Large)
Fasten with adhesive 5 Clamp material
VP20 Top side
Hose band instead of

Local pipes
clamp material (20)

Install the pipe
(70)
VP20 to the support

Top side bracket, then fix it. 6 Attached piping
(Select the liquid and gas pipes
which match the pipe diameters
2 Drain hose Figure 4 Figure 5 of the corresponding indoor unit.) Figure 6
(For use outside the unit)
2 Installation Outline
Remove the lid from the top of the indoor unit, and hang the indoor unit main unit before installing the drain up kit in the following manner. Figure 7
1. Complete the electrical wiring following the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
(Use the wiring through-hole in the top side of the indoor unit to pull the wiring into the indoor unit main unit.)
2. Connect the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit.
(1) Connect the liquid and gas piping to the indoor unit main unit. Figure 8
(2) Wrap the piping connections with the attached insulation pipe cover (medium and small) 7 and fasten either end with the attached clamp material 5 .
Next, put the attached insulating material 8-1 . Wrap gas-side piping with the insulating material attached the indoor unit on top of the insulation pipe cover
wrapped on the piping connections. (For the KDU50M60VE, there are two types of Insulation pipe covers (medium) for the gas pipe connection. Select the one appropriate for the piping size.)
Also, pass the lead wires of swing motor and thermistor through the clamp section of the top lid and fix it so they are as they were before removing the topside through lid.
In order to prevent dust from entering the indoor unit, block any crevices between the lid and the pipes with putty.
Top
plate 5 Clamp material
6 Liquid-side attached piping Clamp part on the top lid
7 Insulation pipe cover
Liquid-side: small
Gas-side: medium
(1) (2) For φ 9.5 : ID φ32×L100 Cut to fit Thermistor lead wires
Top lid For φ 12.7 : ID φ35×L100 the piping
Swing motor lead wires
Insulating material attached 8-1 Insulating material

6 Gas-side attached piping with the indoor unit main unit
Only for gas-side ( Gas-side: one piece, 150×200, thickness 5mm
Liquid-side: one piece, 30×200, thickness 5mm )
(One piece, 100×230, thickness 5mm)
Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9
3. Mount the drain up kit to the indoor unit.

(1) Remove the screws from the top of the indoor unit, and insert the attached screws 4 temporarily. Next, temporarily put the screwed clamps on either end of the drain up kit,
and tighten the screws. Figure 10
Take out the lead wires of drain pump and the float switch from the back of the drain up kit.
Wire the local wiring as shown in Figure 11 .
Float switch lead wires (black)
Remote control cord

From the rear side of the
drain up kit to the control box { Drain pump lead wires (yellow)
Swing motor lead wires
Thermistor lead wires { Pass under the
installation stay and
to the control box
Replace with the
Top plate attached screw 4 Field wiring
Temporary Temporary
fixing fixing
Approx. 5mm
4 Screw
(M4 × 12) Drain up kit
4 Screw installation stay
Float switch lead wires (black)
Drain pump lead wires (yellow) A

View from direction of arrow A Pass over
the installation Local wiring
4 Screw stay and to the
control box
{
Remote control cord Wiring outline
Figure 10 Figure 11
C : 3K012642A

FHQ EDHK281006
(2) Insert the hose band 3 into the external drain hose, firmly insert the drain hose all the way into the drain socket in the drain up kit, and wrap it firmly with the hose band 3
within the area designated by the black tape on the hose end. Figure 12
(3) Put the attached insulating material 8-3 to the external drain hose connector, as shown in Figure 13 .
(4) Connect the indoor unit drain socket and the drain up kit drain socket with the attached drain hose 2 inserting it all the way in, and wrap it firmly with the hose band 3 within
the area designated by the black tape on the hose end. Make sure the hose band connector comes to the top, as in Figure 15 . Figure 14
(5) Insulate the drain hose 2 fixed by the procedure (4) using the attached insulating material 8-2 . Wrap the entire surface over the hose band on the drain hose. Figure 16
8-3 Insulating material

Connector
Indoor unit main unit Drain up kit
3 Hose band drain socket drain socket
3 Hose band
Insert firmly Tape section (black) Tape section (black)
all the way in.
Tape section (black) 3 Hose band
Figure 12 8-2 Insulating

material Insert firmly Cross section 2 Drain hose
Fix making sure that there are no all the way in.
split between the rising face of the 2 Drain hose
drain up kit and the insulation. Figure 15
Figure 14
External drain hose
8-3 Insulating
material
3 Hose band 8-2 Wrap the insulating material
External drain hose 8-3 Insulating material 2 Drain hose

Attach facing the
external drain hose Top view Figure 16
from the drain up kit wall.
Figure 13
3 Electrical wiring
· Wire the float switch lead wires (black), coming out of the drain up kit, and the drain pump lead wires (yellow) in the manner described below.
(Removing the control box makes wiring work easier.) When doing wiring work, be sure to shut off the power. Figure 17
· Refer also to the “Electric Wiring Diagram Plate” when performing wiring work. (It can be found on the control box lid.)
(1) Remove the control box from the indoor unit.
(2) Connect the drain pump lead wires (yellow) to X25A (the white connector) on the indoor unit PC board assembly.
(3) The connector on the PC board assembly to which the float switch lead wires (black) must be connected differs depending on the indoor unit series (Sky Air or VRV Air Conditioner).
Sky Air : Remove the short circuit connector connected to X15A (a green connector), and connect the float switch lead wires.
VRV Air Conditioner : Remove the short circuit connector connected to X8A (a green connector), and connect the float switch lead wires.
(4) After all the wires are connected, arrange them, pass the float switch lead wire (black) through the clamping material, and secure it together with the drain
pump lead wire (yellow) from above the wiring inside the indoor unit using the included clamping material 5 .
(5) Store and secure any extra lead wire with the included clamping material 5 , so that the lid is not pushed up.
Attach the control box securely.
Pass through Drain pump lead Drain pump lead wires
Float switch lead wires (black) wires (yellow)
the clamp material 5 Clamp material Float switch lead wires
Remove the
short circuit
connector. Float switch
lead wires
Sky Air : X15A Internal wiring in the
X15A (green) or X25A
VRV Air Conditioner : X8A indoor unit
X8A (green) (white)
5 Clamp material
X25A
∗ Bind and fix the lead wires from the drain up kit over
Pass through the clamp material Field wiring
(wiring between units) the internal wiring in the indoor unit using the attached
Control box clamp material 5 .
Remote control cord
Fixing screws
for the control box lid (2) Electric wiring
diagram plate Figure 17
Control box lid
4 Installing the decorative panels and suction grill

· Refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and mount the decorative panels and suction grill firmly following the procedure in the opposite way of removing.
C: 3K012643

EDHK281006 FHQ
5 Test Run Procedure
In order to determine the condition of the drainage, slowly pour approximately 1500 ml of water into the unit from the air outlet. Follow the procedure below to check the drainage. Figure 18
The test run procedure differs depending on the indoor unit series (Sky Air or VRV Air Conditioner), so follow the appropriate procedure below.
Sky Air VRV Air Conditioner
If the wiring work is complete If the wiring work is complete
{ Check the drainage while operating in cooling mode. { Check the drainage while operating in cooling mode.
If the wiring work is not complete If the wiring work is not complete
{ Remove the control box lid, connect a single-phase power supply (50/60Hz 220-240V) { Remove the control box lid and connect the remote control and the single-phase
to No. 1 and No. 2 (in the power supply terminal block), and then for safety’s sake, close the lid power source (50/60Hz 220-240V/220V) to the remote control terminal block (P1, P2)
before turning the power on. Figure 19 and the power supply terminal block (L, N).
{ Only the drain pump will run automatically for 10 minutes, so during this time make sure water is { Next, switch the unit to test run mode from the remote control, press the mode
draining out. switch button to select “fan”, and then press the start/stop button to start the indoor
{ Once the drain check is complete, remove the power wires and replace the control box lid as it was. fan and the drain pump. Check the drainage.
{ Take precaution, because the fan will operate as well.
{
Do not connect anything to No. 3 in the power supply terminal block (the drain pump will not operate.)
Do not touch the electrical part, emergency switch. The drain check described above can be
performed without moving the emergency switch.
3
Plastic container Air outlet

for pouring
Figure 19
Make sure not to splash the water.
1 2 3
Figure 18
Power supply
terminal block
Single phase
power supply
C: 3K012643

FHQ EDHK281006

— Replacement Long-life Filter
KAF501DA56 / KAFJ501D56 Dimensions Unit:mm
A
Model A
KAF501DA56
KAFJ501D56 430
KAF501DA80 530
KAFJ501D80
254.5
260
KAF501DA112 430
KAFJ501D112
KAF501DA160
KAFJ501D160 493
Caution
20
· Can be water-washed. Can be reused.
11.5
D3K3074A
Model
KAF501DA56 KAF501DA80 KAF501DA112 KAF501DA160
Item KAFJ501D56 KAFJ501D80 KAFJ501D112 KAFJ501D160
Initial pressure Pa 10 or less

loss
loss
Average
efficiency % 45 (gravity method)
m3/min 13 17 24 32
Air flow rate
I/sec 217 283 400 533
Filter element Mildew-proof resin net
Number of sheets
included 2 2 3 3
Mass (Weight) kg 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6

EDHK281006 FHQ
4.3 KHFP5MA160 — L-type Piping Kit (for Upward Direction)

KHFP5MA35 Dimensions Unit:mm
KHFP5MA35
Piping for Liquid Side

R410A 6.4
Piping for Gas side

R410A 9.5
When you install the refrigerant piping in the

ceiling, the piping is required to be bent L-type
KHFP5MA63 3
in the unit as shown on the right. This L-type
piping kit is developed to facilitate such
Piping for Liquid Side
installation. R410A 6.4
Installation
Piping for Gas side
L-type piping kit R410A 12.7
KHFP5MA160
Piping for liquid side
Piping for gas side
J : D3K03612B
Model
KHFP5MA35 KHFP5MA63 KHFP5MA160
Item
Accessories Installation for fitting : 1 set

Clamp material : 4 pieces

FHQ EDHK281006
4.4 KRP1CA93 — Installation Box for Adaptor PCB

Model
KRP1CA93
Item
Installation Interior of unit
Width mm 109
Dimensions Length mm 124
Depth mm 38
Installation box. Box cover. Clamp. Screws.
Component parts Installation Manual.
Installation
3K09595B

EDHK281006 FHQ
3K09595B

FHQ EDHK281006

Model
KRCS01-1B KRCS01-4B
Item
Remote sensor.
Clamps: 2


EDHK281006 FHQ
Installation
3K019189B

FHQ EDHK281006
3K019189B

EDHK281006 FHQ
3K019189B

FHQ EDHK281006
4.6 DTA112BA51 — Interface Adaptor for SkyAir Series

Installation
1P107904C

EDHK281006 FHQ
C: 1P107904C

FHQ EDHK281006
4.7 KJB212AA / KJB311AA — Electrical Box with Earth Terminal
Installation
3PA34878C

EDHK281006 FHQ
3PA34878C

FBQ EDHK281006
5. FBQ
— Service Access Panel
KTBJ25K80W
Model KTBJ25K36W(T)(F) KTBJ25K56W(T)(F) KTBJ25K80W(T)(F) KTBJ25K160W(T)(F)
Item
Colour W : White, T : Brown, F : Fresh white
Mass (Weight) kg 6.0 6.5 9.0 10.7
Caution
• Ceiling joist and ceiling joist support required. (Locally procured.)
Dimensions Unit:mm
Filter chamber for

rear side air inlet
(optional accessories)
Air Rear side
conditioner of the unit
Ceiling
Model Colour
White
Brown
Fresh white
White
Brown
Fresh white
White
Brown
Fresh white
White
Brown
Fresh white
JC : D3K1126A
• The inspection hatch can be made to look nice with the service access panel.
• Thin 10 mm design for the exposed part.

EDHK281006 FBQ
Installation
3P225173A

FBQ EDHK281006
3P225173A

EDHK281006 FBQ
5.2 KDAJ25K71A / KDAJ25K140A — Air Discharge Adaptor

KDAJ25K56A Model
KDAJ25K36A KDAJ25K56A KDAJ25K71A KDAJ25K140A
Item
Duct connection φ200×1 port φ200×2 port φ200×4 port
diameter
Material Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheets. EPS. Insulation.
Accessories Screws. Installation manual.
Mass (Weight) kg 1.0 1.5 2.5 3.5
Dimensions Unit:mm 3
KDAJ25K36A KDAJ25K56A
375
φ200
332
300
150
245
A arrow view
D3K06518 D3K06136
KDAJ25K71A KDAJ25K140A
D3K06137 D3K06138A
Installation
Suction duct (Field supply)

To air discharge unit
To air discharge unit
Suction grille (Field supply) Flexible duct with insulation

(Field supply)
Inlet air
Air discharge adaptor

FBQ EDHK281006
Installation
3P012475C

EDHK281006 FBQ

— High Efficiency Filter
Model
KAF372 KAF373 KAF372 KAF373 KAF372 KAF373 KAF372 KAF373
Item AA36 AA36 AA56 AA56 AA80 AA80 AA160 AA160
Initial pressure 15 or 21 or 35 or 54 or 35 or 54 or 38 or 56 or
loss Pa less less less less less less less less
loss
Average
efficiency % 65 90 65 90 65 90 65 90
(colourimetric
method)
Air flow rate /
1 sheet m3/min 9.8 3
Life *1 h 2,500 1,800 2,500 1,800 2,500 1,800 2,500 1,800
Number of sheets 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
included
Note:
Caution *1. Dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3
· Cannot be water-washed for reuse.
· The filter chamber (for high efficiency filter)
(KDDF37AA36 / KDDF37AA56 / KDDF37AA80
/ KDDF37AA160) is required when the high
efficiency filter will be installed.
Dimensions Unit:mm
AA Applied models
Hook and loose Hook and KAF372AA36
fastener loose fastener 550
KAF373AA36
(black) AA (white) 355
KAF372AA56, 80, 160
KAF373AA56, 80, 160
Note:
KAF372AA36, KAF373AA36:
Without hook and loose fastener.
Filter connecting figure

Filter element Filter frame
J : D3K06645
J : D3K07003

FBQ EDHK281006
5.4 KDDF37AA80 / KDDF37AA160 — High Efficiency Filter Chamber

Model
KDDF37AA36 KDDF37AA56 KDDF37AA80 KDDF37AA160
Item
High 65% (colourimetric method) KAF372AA36 KAF372AA56 KAF372AA80 KAF372AA160
Inserted efficiency
filter 90% (colourimetric method) KAF373AA36 KAF373AA56 KAF373AA80 KAF373AA160
filter
Long life filter KAF371AA36 KAF371AA56 KAF371AA80 KAF371AA160
Accessories Mounting screws. Installation manual.
Mass (Weight) kg 4.5 6 7 9
Dimensions Unit:mm
oblong hole
Indoor unit side
Service space
(Service cover side)
High efficiency filter Long life filter burring
Connection duct side

Service cover Connection duct
Model opening
JC : D3K06642C

EDHK281006 FBQ
Installation
C : 3K021007

FBQ EDHK281006
3K021007

EDHK281006 FBQ
5.5 KAF371AA80 / KAF371AA160 — Long Life Filter

Dimensions Unit:mm
AA
AA Applied models
548 KAF371AA36
353 KAF371AA56, 80, 160
J : D3K06644
J : D3K07004
Caution Model
KAF371AA36 KAF371AA56 KAF371AA80 KAF371AA160
· Can be water-washed. Can be reused. Item
· The filter chamber (KDDF37AA36 / Initial pressure loss Pa 3 or less 7 or less 8 or less
KDDF37AA56 / KDDF37AA80 / KDDF37AA160) Final pressure loss Pa 49 or less
is required when the long life filter will be Average efficiency % 50 (gravity method)
installed. Air flow rate / 1 sheet m3/min 9.8

Filter element Mildew-proof resin net (Polypropylene)
Filter frame Polystyrene
Number of sheets included 1 2 3 4

FBQ EDHK281006
5.6 KAF375AA80 / KAF375AA160 — Long Life Filter Chamber Kit

Model
KAF375AA36 KAF375AA56 KAF375AA80 KAF375AA160
Item
Long life filter *1 KAF371AA36 KAF371AA56 KAF371AA80 KAF371AA160
Accessories Mounting screws. Installation manual. Protection net. Mounting screws. Installation manual.
Mass (Weight) kg 4 4.5 5.5 7.5
Note: *1. The long life filter is packed inside the chamber.
Dimensions Unit:mm
KAF375AA36
oblong hole
Indoor unit side
Service space
Service space
Long life filter
Air inlet side

Service cover
( The duct connection of the long
life filter chamber is not possible. ) J: D3K07519A
KAF375AA56 / KAF375AA80 / KAF375AA160
oblong hole
Indoor unit side
Service space
Long life filter
Air inlet side

Service cover
( The duct connection of the long
life filter chamber is not possible. )
Model
J: D3K06729A

EDHK281006 FBQ
Installation
C : 3K021008

FBQ EDHK281006
3K021008

EDHK281006 FBQ
5.7 KRP4A96 — Mounting Plate for Adaptor PCB

Dimension Unit:mm Model
KRP4A96
Item
Main unit mounting Material Steel sheet (t=0.8 coating)
claw (2 places)
Mounting screws (M4×8) : 2.
Accessories Sealing material : 2.
Clamp : 8. Installation manual.
Hole Hole
Main unit mounting hole

hole
Adaptor mounting hole
hole
3
Clamp material mounting hole (10 places)
J : D3K06565A

FBQ EDHK281006
Installation
2P226887

EDHK281006 FBQ
2P226887

FBQ EDHK281006

Model
KRCS01-1B KRCS01-4B
Item
Remote sensor.
Clamps: 2


EDHK281006 FBQ
Installation
3K019189B

FBQ EDHK281006
3K019189B

EDHK281006 FBQ
3K019189B

Outdoor Unit EDHK281006
6. Outdoor Unit
6.1 KKPJ5F180 — Central Drain Plug
KKPJ5F180 Dimensions Unit:mm
Drain socket Drain cap Drain receiver
J : D3K1342A
Model
KKPJ5F180
Item
Connecting drain hose φ25 (inside diameter)
Installation
3P066795B

EDHK281006
Warning Daikin Industries, Ltd.’s products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the
EDHK281006
world. Daikin Industries, Ltd. does not have control over which products are exported to and used in a
particular country. Prior to purchase, please therefore confirm with your local authorised importer,
distributor and/or retailer whether this product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for
use, in the region where the product will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict
or modify the application of any local legislation.
Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
ENGINEERING DATA
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
Read the User's Manual carefully before using this product. The User's Manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cooling only [50Hz]
RR series
RR series
Cooling only [50Hz]

Cautions on product corrosion
1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES, LTD. Organization:
AIR CONDITIONING MANUFACTURING DIVISION DAIKIN INDUSTRIES
(THAILAND) LTD. All of the Daikin Group’s business
Scope of Registration: facilities and subsidiaries in Japan
THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT AND MANUFACTURE OF Scope of Registration: are certified under the ISO 14001
COMMERCIAL AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, COOLING, THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT international standard for
REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT, COMMERCIAL HEATING AND MANUFACTURE OF AIR environment management.
EQUIPMENT, RESIDENTIAL AIR CONDITIONING CONDITIONERS AND THE
EQUIPMENT, HEAT RECLAIM VENTILATION, AIR COMPONENTS INCLUDING
JMI-0107 CLEANING EQUIPMENT, MARINE TYPE CONTAINER JQA-1452 COMPRESSORS USED FOR THEM
REFRIGERATION UNITS, COMPRESSORS AND VALVES.
Dealer
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/global_ac/
c All rights reserved
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of March 2010 but subject to change without notice.
EDHK281006
Printed in Japan 03/10/001 AK·FS.K

Cooling Only (50Hz) : RR Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cooling Only (50Hz) : RR Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EDHK281006

Cooling only [50Hz]

Cooling only [50Hz]

Part 1 SkyAir RR Series ................................................................ 1

Part 2 Installation of Indoor / Outdoor Unit................................ 59

Part 3 Detail Information of Options ........................................ 171

2. Remote Controller ...............................................................................176

FCQ 71K 100K 125K 140K

Indoor unit FHQ 71BV 100BV 125BV

FBQ-D 71D 100D 125D 140D

Outdoor unit RR 71M 100M 125M 140M

13.Sound Level ..........................................................................................54

FCQ FHQ FBQ-D

BRC1C61 BRC1D61 BRC1E61

RR71MV1 / RR71MY1 RR100MY1 RR125MY1 RR140MY1

2. Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature

Indoor unit Outdoor unit Power supply

Indicates Major Design Category

Items Features FCQ FHQ FBQ-D

Notes: { : Functions exist.

3.2 Outdoor Unit

Notes: { : Functions exist.

FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–) 1

FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–)

FHQ (Ceiling suspended type) 1

FHQ (Ceiling suspended type)

FBQ (Duct connection middle and high static pressure type) 1

FBQ (Duct connection middle and high static pressure type)

FBQ (Duct connection middle and high static pressure type) 1

5. Dimensions and Service Space

FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA 1

127 (View from the front)

4-M8 ~ M10 for taking out in piping back

55 1 Air discharge grille

For height installation

From the floor side 2500 or more

Drain pipe 9 Backward piping and wiring connection opening lid

14 Right side drain pipe connection

80 80 16 Upward drain pipe connection φ60

Position slit hole for taking out in piping back

(View from the front)

For height installation

From the floor side 2500 or more

7 Earth terminal (Inside the electric components box) M4

12 Left back drain pipe connection Slit hole

13 Left side drain pipe connection Slit hole

14 Right side drain pipe connection Slit hole

80 80 15 Hole of wall for taking out in piping back φ100

16 Upward drain pipe connection φ60

Position slit hole for taking out in piping back

55 Number Name Description

For height installation

From the floor side 2500 or more

Drain pipe 7 Earth terminal (Inside the electric components box) M4

12 Left back drain pipe connection Slit hole

13 Left side drain pipe connection Slit hole

14 Right side drain pipe connection Slit hole

FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1

5.2 Wired Remote Controller

NOTE) 1. REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD AND STAPLE ARE NOT ATTACHED.

5.3 Wireless Remote Controller

BRC7E66 (for FHQ)